7MF4033 1ga10 2ab6 Za01

Siemens
Energy & Automation USER'S MANUAL
UMSITRPDS3-1
Rev. 4
September 2004
Supersedes Rev. 3
SITRANS P, Series DSIII Transmitter

for
Pressure, Differential Pressure,
Flanged Level, and Absolute Pressure
Model 7MF4*33-...
IMPORTANT
MODEL 275 HART COMMUNICATOR AND

MODEL 375 FIELD COMMUNICATOR
Many procedures, screens, and wiring diagrams shown in this manual feature the Model 275 HART
Communicator.
The Model 375 Field Communicator is now available. Procedures and screens are similar to those for the
Model 275, however, there are significant differences and an online Configuration Map for use with the
Model 375 is provided at the back of this manual.
Transmitter model and firmware version can affect the displays, display options, and Configuration Maps.
Whether using the Model 275 or the Model 375, be sure to read the manual supplied by the manufacturer
before installing or using the device. Refer to the devices nameplate for hazardous are certifications and
approvals and other important information.
APPLICATION AND MODEL QUICK LOCATOR
The following table provides an overview of measurement categories and available models. For details
pertaining to a particular model, see its model designation table and its specification table in Section 9
Model Designations and Specifications. To quickly locate other information, refer to the Table of
Contents.
Measurement Models Model Designation Specifications Dimensions
7MF4033 Table 9-1 Table 9-15 Figure 9-1

Absolute or Gauge
Pressure
7MF4433 Table 9-4 Table 9-15 Figure 9-2 or 9-3
Differential Pressure
Level (Flange)
UMSITRPDS3-1 Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION AND TITLE PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 CONTENTS ...................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION...........................................................................................................1-2
1.3 RATING, APPROVAL, AND TAG PLATES...............................................................................1-9
1.4 CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................................1-9
1.5 PRODUCT SUPPORT .................................................................................................................1-10
2.0 MODEL 275 UNIVERSAL HART COMMUNICATOR .............................................................2-1

2.1 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 COMMUNICATOR CONNECTIONS..........................................................................................2-1
2.3 CONTROLS OVERVIEW .............................................................................................................2-4
2.3.1 Liquid Crystal Display ...........................................................................................................2-4
2.3.2 Software-Defined Function Keys ...........................................................................................2-4
2.3.3 Action Keys ............................................................................................................................2-6
2.3.4 Alphanumeric and Shift Keys.................................................................................................2-7
2.3.4.1 Rapid Selection of Menu Options ..................................................................................2-7
2.3.4.2 Data Entry ......................................................................................................................2-7
2.4 GETTING TO KNOW THE COMMUNICATOR ........................................................................2-8
2.4.1 Display Icons ..........................................................................................................................2-8
2.4.2 Menu Structure .......................................................................................................................2-9
2.4.3 Reviewing Installed Devices ..................................................................................................2-9
2.5 MAIN MENU...............................................................................................................................2-11
2.5.1 Offline Menu ........................................................................................................................2-12
2.5.1.1 New Configuration .......................................................................................................2-13
2.5.1.2 Saved Configuration.....................................................................................................2-16
2.5.2 Online Menu.........................................................................................................................2-18
2.5.3 Frequency Device Menu.......................................................................................................2-21
2.5.4 Utility Menu .........................................................................................................................2-21
2.5.4.1 Configure Communicator.............................................................................................2-21
2.5.4.2 System Information ......................................................................................................2-22
2.5.4.3 Listen for PC ................................................................................................................2-22
2.5.4.4 Storage Location ..........................................................................................................2-22
2.5.4.5 Simulation ....................................................................................................................2-22
2.5.4.6 Selftest..........................................................................................................................2-22
2.6 USING THE QUICK ACCESS KEY ..........................................................................................2-23
2.6.1 Adding Quick Access Key Options......................................................................................2-24
2.6.2 Deleting Quick Access Key Options ....................................................................................2-25
3.0 PRE-INSTALLATION TEST .........................................................................................................3-1

3.1 PROCEDURE.................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Test Equipment.......................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION ........................................................................................3-3
3.3 TESTING THE TRANSMITTER ..................................................................................................3-3
3.4 REVIEWING CONFIGURATION DATA....................................................................................3-4
3.5 CHECKING TRANSMITTER OUTPUT ......................................................................................3-4
4.0 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY AND HANDLING.............................................................................4-1
September 2004 i
Contents UMSITRPDS3-1
4.1.1 Receipt of Shipment ...............................................................................................................4-1

4.1.2 Storage....................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS ..................................................................................4-2
4.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS AND CALCULATIONS......................................4-2
4.3.1 Mechanical .............................................................................................................................4-2
4.3.2 Electrical.................................................................................................................................4-3
4.3.3 Impulse Piping for Absolute and Differential Models ...........................................................4-4
4.3.4 Transmitter Operating Mode and Network Type .................................................................4-10
4.3.4.1 Analog Mode................................................................................................................4-10
4.3.4.2 Digital Mode ................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.5 Power Supply Requirements ................................................................................................4-14
4.3.5.1 Point-to-Point Network ................................................................................................4-16
4.3.5.2 Multi-Drop Network.....................................................................................................4-16
4.3.6 Determining Network (Loop) Length...................................................................................4-17
4.3.6.1 Cable Capacitance ........................................................................................................4-17
4.3.6.2 Maximum Cable Length Calculation ...........................................................................4-17
4.3.7 Network Junctions ................................................................................................................4-18
4.3.8 Safety Barriers ......................................................................................................................4-19
4.3.9 Connection of Miscellaneous Hardware...............................................................................4-19
4.3.10 Shielding and Grounding....................................................................................................4-20
4.4 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION..............................................................................................4-21
4.4.1 Pipe Mounting, Differential and Gauge Construction ..........................................................4-21
4.4.2 Direct Mounting to Process, Model 7MF4433 or 7MF4533 ................................................4-23
4.4.3 Flange Mounting, Model 7MF4633/7MF4912.....................................................................4-24
4.5 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION, ALL MODELS...................................................................4-26
4.5.1 Enclosure Rotation ...............................................................................................................4-26
4.5.2 Display Orientation ..............................................................................................................4-27
4.5.3 Electrical Conduit and Cable Installation .............................................................................4-28
4.5.3.1 Conduit .........................................................................................................................4-28
4.5.3.2 Cables ...........................................................................................................................4-29
4.5.3.3 Access to Transmitter Terminal Compartment ............................................................4-29
4.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ................................................................................................4-30
4.7 HAZARDOUS AREA INSTALLATION....................................................................................4-32
5.0 POST-INSTALLATION TEST .......................................................................................................5-1

5.1 TEST EQUIPMENT.......................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 INSTALLATION REVIEW...........................................................................................................5-1
5.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION ......................................................................................................5-2
5.4 VERIFICATION ............................................................................................................................5-3
5.4.1 Communication Test ..............................................................................................................5-3
5.4.2 Transmitter Selftest ................................................................................................................5-3
5.4.3 Loop Test................................................................................................................................5-4
5.5 TRANSMITTER ZERO AND SHUTOFF VALVE MANIPULATION.......................................5-5
5.5.1 Absolute Pressure ...................................................................................................................5-5
5.5.1.1 Measuring Gases ............................................................................................................5-6
5.5.1.2 Measuring Vapor and Liquid .........................................................................................5-7
5.5.2 Differential Pressure and Flow ...............................................................................................5-8
5.5.2.1 Measuring Gases ............................................................................................................5-8
5.5.2.2 Measuring Liquids..........................................................................................................5-9
5.5.3 Measuring Vapor ..................................................................................................................5-11
ii September 2004
6.0 ON-LINE CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION.....................................................................6-1

6.1 LOCAL OPERATION AND DISPLAY ........................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Digital Display........................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Numeric Display.....................................................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 Unit/Bargraph Display............................................................................................................6-3
6.1.4 Error Message.........................................................................................................................6-3
6.1.5 Output Signal Range...............................................................................................................6-3
6.1.6 Mode Display ..........................................................................................................................6-4
6.2 LOCAL OPERATION WITH THE MAGNETIC PUSHBUTTONS............................................6-5
6.2.1 Cancel Pushbutton Disable and Write Protection...................................................................6-7
6.2.2 Set/Adjust Zero and Full Scale...............................................................................................6-7
6.2.2.1 Theoretical Relationships ...............................................................................................6-7
6.2.2.2 Practical Applications ....................................................................................................6-9
6.2.3 Electric Damping..................................................................................................................6-10
6.2.4 Blind Setting of Zero and Full Scale ....................................................................................6-10
6.2.4.1 Theoretical Relationships .............................................................................................6-10
6.2.4.2 Practical Applications ..................................................................................................6-11
6.2.5 Zero Adjustment (Position Correction) ................................................................................6-12
6.2.5.1 Zero-Point Alignment at Absolute Pressure.................................................................6-12
6.2.6 Fixed Current Output............................................................................................................6-13
6.2.7 Failure Current......................................................................................................................6-13
6.2.8 Pushbutton and Function Disable .........................................................................................6-14
6.2.9 Flow Measurement (Differential Pressure only) ..................................................................6-14
6.2.10 Select Measured Value to be Displayed .............................................................................6-16
6.2.11 Select the Displayed Input Pressure Engineering Unit.......................................................6-16
6.3 LOCAL OPERATION WITHOUT A DISPLAY OR WITH ACTIVATED KEYLOCK ..........6-18
6.3.1 Set Zero and Full Scale.........................................................................................................6-18
6.4 REMOTE CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION BY HART ................................................6-20
6.4.1 Process Data .........................................................................................................................6-20
6.4.2 Setting Zero and Full Scale ..................................................................................................6-21
6.4.3 Blind Setting of Zero and Full Scale ....................................................................................6-21
6.4.4 Zero Adjustment for Position Correction .............................................................................6-21
6.4.5 Electric Damping..................................................................................................................6-22
6.4.6 Fast Measured Value Acquisition (fast response mode) ......................................................6-22
6.4.7 Fixed Current Output............................................................................................................6-23
6.4.8 Fault Current.........................................................................................................................6-23
6.4.9 Disabling the Transmitter Magnetic Pushbuttons and Write Protection ..............................6-24
6.4.10 Measured Value Display ....................................................................................................6-25
6.4.11 Select Pressure Engineering Units......................................................................................6-25
6.4.12 Display/Bargraph................................................................................................................6-25
6.4.13 Sensor Trim ........................................................................................................................6-26
6.4.13.1 Trimming the Lower Sensor Adjustment Point..........................................................6-26
6.4.13.2 Trimming the Upper Sensor Adjustment Point ..........................................................6-27
6.4.14 D/A Trim ............................................................................................................................6-28
6.4.15 Transmitter Current Adjustment.........................................................................................6-28
6.4.16 Factory Calibration (Manufacturer Trims) .........................................................................6-29
6.4.17 Device Information.............................................................................................................6-30
6.4.18 Flow Measurement (Differential Pressure) ........................................................................6-30
6.4.19 Diagnostic Functions ..........................................................................................................6-30
6.4.19.1 Operating Hours Counter ...........................................................................................6-31
6.4.19.2 Calibration Timer and Service Timer.........................................................................6-31
6.4.19.3 Min/Max Pointer ........................................................................................................6-32
September 2004 iii

6.4.19.4 Monitoring the Saturation Current .............................................................................6-32

6.4.20 Simulation...........................................................................................................................6-33
6.4.21 Self Test and Master Reset .................................................................................................6-35
7.0 CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................7-1

7.1 CALIBRATION .............................................................................................................................7-2
7.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................7-3
7.2.1 Transmitter Exterior Inspection..............................................................................................7-3
7.2.2 Transmitter Exterior Cleaning ................................................................................................7-3
7.2.3 Transmitter Enclosure Interior Inspection ..............................................................................7-4
7.2.4 Transmitter Calibration...........................................................................................................7-4
7.2.5 Impulse Piping........................................................................................................................7-4
7.3 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................................7-5
7.3.1 Analog Output ........................................................................................................................7-5
7.3.2 Digital Output (Communication)............................................................................................7-8
7.4 ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT.......................................................................7-9
7.4.1 Display Assembly.................................................................................................................7-11
7.4.2 Replacing the Electronics Module........................................................................................7-12
7.4.3 Measuring Cell Assembly Removal and Replacement ........................................................7-13
7.4.4 Terminal Board Assembly Removal and Replacement........................................................7-16
7.5 NON-FIELD-REPLACEABLE ITEMS.......................................................................................7-16
7.6 TRANSMITTER REPLACEMENT ............................................................................................7-17
7.7 MAINTENANCE RECORDS......................................................................................................7-18
7.8 RECOMMENDED SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS.....................................................7-18
7.9 COMPATIBILITY, REVISION NUMBERS ..............................................................................7-19
8.0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................8-1

8.1 OVERALL OPERATION ..............................................................................................................8-2
8.2 PRESSURE.....................................................................................................................................8-2
8.3 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AND FLOW .................................................................................8-3
8.4 FLANGED LEVEL ........................................................................................................................8-3
8.5 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (DIFFERENTIAL CONSTRUCTION) ...............................................8-4
8.6 ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (GAUGE CONSTRUCTION) .............................................................8-4
8.7 COMMUNICATION FORMAT....................................................................................................8-5
9.0 MODEL DESIGNATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................9-1

9.1 MODEL DESIGNATIONS............................................................................................................9-1
9.2 ACCESSORIES............................................................................................................................9-20
9.3 SPECIFICATIONS.......................................................................................................................9-21
9.4 MEASURING SPANS AND OVERLOAD LIMITS ..................................................................9-29
9.5 NETWORK TOPOLOGY............................................................................................................9-35
9.5.1 Two-Wire Cable ...................................................................................................................9-35
9.6 HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATIONS ..............................................................................9-35
9.6.1 CSA Hazardous Locations Precautions ................................................................................9-36
10. 0 GLOSSARY..................................................................................................................................10-1
A.0 APPENDIX A - ONLINE CONFIGURATION MAP ................................................................. A-1
B.0 APPENDIX B - HAZARDOUS AREA INSTALLATION .......................................................... B-1
iv September 2004
C.0 APPENDIX C - ELEVATION AND SUPPRESSION CORRECTIONS .................................. C-1

C.1 HOW ADJUSTMENT IS MADE ......................................................................................... C-1
C.2 ELEVATION CALCULATION EXAMPLE ....................................................................... C-2
C.3 SUPPRESSION CALCULATION EXAMPLE.................................................................... C-2
C.4 RECOMMENDED METHOD.............................................................................................. C-3
WARRANTY........................................................................................................................................... W1
ONLINE CONFIGURATION MAPS..........................................................................At back of manual

When using the Model 275 Universal HART Communicator
When using the Model 375 Field Communicator
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE AND TITLE PAGE
1-1 Gauge Construction, Pressure and Absolute Models..........................................................................1-3

1-2 Differential Construction; Differential, Flow, and Absolute Models .................................................1-4
1-3 Differential Pressure and Flow Models with H03 Option ..................................................................1-5
1-4 Flanged Liquid Level Models.............................................................................................................1-6
1-5 Traditional Application.......................................................................................................................1-7
1-6 Display................................................................................................................................................1-8
1-7 Field Terminals...................................................................................................................................1-8
2-1 Model 275 Universal HART Communicator......................................................................................2-2

2-2 HART Communicator Connections to a Transmitter Loop................................................................2-3
2-3 HART Communicator Display Icons .................................................................................................2-8
2-4 Offline Menu Map ............................................................................................................................2-12
2-5 SITRANS P Online Menu Map........................................................................................................2-19
2-6 Generic Online Menu Map ...............................................................................................................2-20
3-1 Bench Test Connections .....................................................................................................................3-1

3-2 Field Test Connections .......................................................................................................................3-2
4-1 Differential Flow Measurement Piping for Gas and Liquid ...............................................................4-5
4-2 Differential Liquid Measurement Piping............................................................................................4-6
4-3 Absolute or Gauge Pressure Measurement Piping .............................................................................4-7
4-4 Steam Service, Below the Line Mounting ..........................................................................................4-8
4-5 Open and Closed Tank Level Measurement, Flange Mounted Transmitters .....................................4-9
4-6 Point-To-Point Network (Analog Mode)..........................................................................................4-11
4-7 Procidia to Transmitter Connections (Analog Mode).......................................................................4-12
4-8 Model 353/354 to Transmitter Connections (Analog Mode) ...........................................................4-13
4-9 Multi-Drop Network (Digital Mode)................................................................................................4-15
4-10 Pipe Mounting, Gauge Construction ..............................................................................................4-22
4-11 Pipe Mounting, Differential Construction ......................................................................................4-22
4-12 Differential Construction, Position Options ...................................................................................4-23
4-13 Enclosure Rotation Considerations.................................................................................................4-26
4-14 Display Removal and Repositioning ..............................................................................................4-27
4-15 Conduit Drain and Explosion Proof Installations ...........................................................................4-28
4-16 Network Conductor Terminations ..................................................................................................4-31
5-1 Equipment Connection for System Checkout.....................................................................................5-2

5-2 Measuring Gases.................................................................................................................................5-6
September 2004 v
5-3 Measuring Vapor and Liquid..............................................................................................................5-7

5-4 Measuring Gases.................................................................................................................................5-9
5-5 Measuring Liquids............................................................................................................................5-10
5-6 Measuring Vapor ..............................................................................................................................5-11
6-1 Digital Display....................................................................................................................................6-1

6-2 Switch Point of the Square Root Characteristic................................................................................6-15
6-3 Displayable Engineering Units .........................................................................................................6-17
6-4 Sensor (Measuring Cell) Trim ..........................................................................................................6-27
6-5 Pressure Min/Max Pointer Example .................................................................................................6-32
6-6 Saturation Monitoring Examples......................................................................................................6-33
6-7 Simulation Circuit Diagram..............................................................................................................6-34
7-1 Transmitter Exploded View................................................................................................................7-9

7-2 Display Assembly Installed and Partially Removed.........................................................................7-11
7-3 Electronics Module Removal and Installation..................................................................................7-12
7-4 Measuring Cell Alignment and Insertion Depth...............................................................................7-15
8-1 Transmitter Block Diagram ................................................................................................................8-1

8-2 Pressure Measuring Cell .....................................................................................................................8-2
8-3 Differential Pressure and Flow Measuring Cell .................................................................................8-3
8-4 Flanged Level Measuring Cell............................................................................................................8-4
8-5 Absolute Pressure Measuring Cell, Differential Construction ...........................................................8-4
8-6 Absolute Pressure Measuring Cell, Gauge Construction....................................................................8-5
9-1 Dimensions, Gauge Construction, Pressure and Absolute Models...................................................9-31

9-2 Dimensions, Differential Construction, Differential, Flow, and Absolute Pressure Models............9-32
9-3 Dimensions, Differential Pressure and Flow Models with H03 Option ...........................................9-33
9-4 Dimensions, Flange Level Models ...................................................................................................9-34
9-5 Declaration of Conformity................................................................................................................9-38
9-6 Certificate of NACE Compliance.....................................................................................................9-39
A-1 Online Configuration Map................................................................................................................ A-2
B-1 Control Drawing for Sitrans P DSIII Transmitter............................................................................. B-2
C-1 Elevated Span Example .................................................................................................................... C-1

C-2 Suppressed Span Example ................................................................................................................ C-1
C-3 Elevation Calculation Example......................................................................................................... C-2
C-4 Suppression Calculation Example .................................................................................................... C-2
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE AND TITLE PAGE
1-1 Measurement and Model vs. Figure References.................................................................................1-2

1-2 Contact Information..........................................................................................................................1-11
2-1 Function Keys with Their Labels and Actions Performed .................................................................2-5
2-2 Communicator Firmware Device Descriptions, Rev. F2.2...............................................................2-10
2-3 Offline Menu Map Continued, “Edit Individually” Options ............................................................2-12
4-1 Operating Mode and Network ..........................................................................................................4-10
vi September 2004
4-2 Flange and Extension Dimensions....................................................................................................4-25
6-1 Operating Mode and Status Arrows ...................................................................................................6-2

6-2 Parameters Accessible Using the Magnetic Pushbuttons ...................................................................6-6
6-3 Pushbutton and Function Disable Options .......................................................................................6-14
6-4 Pushbutton and Function Disable Options .......................................................................................6-24
9-1 Model 7MF4033, Model Designation ................................................................................................9-2

9-5 Model 7MF4533, Model Designation ..............................................................................................9-10
9-6 Model 7MF4633 and 7MF4912, Model Designation.......................................................................9-12
9-7 Measuring Cells for Pressure, Service Parts.....................................................................................9-15
9-8 Measuring Cells for Absolute Pressure, Gauge Construction, Service Parts ...................................9-15
9-9 Measuring Cells for Absolute Pressure, Differential Construction, Service Parts ...........................9-16
9-10 Measuring Cells for Pressure and Flow, Differential Construction, Service Parts.........................9-17
9-11 Measuring Cells for Differential Pressure and Flow, Service Parts ...............................................9-18
9-12 Measuring Cell for Filling Level, Service Parts .............................................................................9-19
9-13 Electronics and Connecting Boards, Service Parts.........................................................................9-19
9-14 Accessories .....................................................................................................................................9-20
9-15 Specifications, Pressure and Differential Pressure Models ............................................................9-21
9-16 Specifications, Absolute Pressure and Filling Level Models .........................................................9-25
9-17 Pressure Transmitter, Model 7MF4033 ..........................................................................................9-29
9-18 Differential Pressure and Flow Transmitters, 7MF4433 & 7MF4533 ...........................................9-29
9-19 Absolute Pressure, Gauge Construction, 7MF4233........................................................................9-29
9-20 Absolute Pressure, Differential Construction, 7MF4333 ...............................................................9-30
9-21 Flanged Level, 7MF4633/7MF4912...............................................................................................9-30
Changes for Revision 4, September 2004
Significant changes for Rev. 4 are indicated by change bars in the page margins. Some are listed below.
Section Revision
Cover Manual revision number and date changed.
Appendix B Control drawings updated.
SITRANS P, Series DS III, and Procidia are Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. trademarks. All other trademarks are the
property of their respective owners.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. assumes no liability for errors or omissions in this document or for the application and use
of information included in this document. The information herein is subject to change without notice.
Procedures in this document have been reviewed for compliance with applicable approval agency requirements and are
considered sound practice. Neither Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. nor these agencies is responsible for repairs made by
the user.

September 2004 vii

Conventions, Symbols, and General Information UMSITRPDS3-1
Conventions, Symbols, and General Information
Conventions and Symbols
The following symbols may be used in this manual and may appear on the equipment. The reader should
become familiar with the symbols and their meaning. Symbols are provided to quickly alert the reader to
safety related text.
Symbol Meaning
Indicates an immediate hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
DANGER death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

WARNING in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in

CAUTION minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in

CAUTION property damage.
Indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an

NOTICE undesirable result or state.
Important Identifies an action that should be taken to avoid an undesirable result or state.
Note Identifies additional information that should be read.
Electrical shock hazard. The included Warning text states that the danger of
electrical shock is present.
Electrical shock hazard. Indicated that the danger of electrical shock is
present.
Explosion hazard. Indicates that the danger of an explosion hazard exists.
Electrostatic discharge. The presence of this symbol indicates that

electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic assembly.
Qualified Persons
The described equipment should be installed, configured, operated, and serviced only by qualified persons
thoroughly familiar with this User’s Manual. A copy of this manual accompanies the equipment. The
current version of the manual, in Portable Document Format (PDF), can be downloaded from
www.sea.siemens.com/ia/.
viii September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Conventions, Symbols, and General Information
For the purpose of this manual and product labels, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the
installation, assembly, commissioning, and operation of the product, and who has the appropriate
qualifications for their activities such as:
• Training, instruction, or authorization to operate and maintain devices/systems according to the safety
standards for electrical circuits, high pressures, and corrosive, as well as, critical media.
• For devices with explosion protection: training, instruction or authorization to work on electrical
circuits for systems that could cause explosions.
• Training or instruction according to the safety standards in the care and use of suitable safety
equipment.
Scope
This manual does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should further
information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the
purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to one of the support groups listed in the Product
Support section of this manual.
The contents of this manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement,
commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements continued
herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.
General Warnings and Cautions
WARNING
An explosion-proof device may be opened only after power is removed from the device.
An intrinsically safe device loses its license as soon as it is operated in a circuit that does not meet the
requirements of the examination certificate valid in your country.
The device may be operated with high pressure and corrosive media. Therefore, serious injury and/or
considerable material damage cannot be ruled out in the event of handling of the device.
The perfect and safe operation of the equipment is conditional upon proper transport, proper storage,
installation and assembly, as well as, on careful operation and commissioning.
The equipment may be used only for the purposes specified in this User’s Manual.
CAUTION
Electrostatic discharge can damage or cause the failure of semiconductor devices such as
integrated circuits and transistors. The symbol at right appears on a circuit board or other
electronic assembly to indicate that special handling precautions are needed.
September 2004 ix
Conventions, Symbols, and General Information UMSITRPDS3-1
• A properly grounded conductive wrist strap must be worn whenever an electronics module or circuit
board is handled or touched. A service kit with a wrist strap and static dissipative mat is available
from Siemens (PN15545-110). Equivalent kits are available from both mail order and local electronic
supply companies.
• Electronic assemblies must be stored in static protective bags when not installed in equipment.
x September 2004
UMSITRPDS3-1 Introduction
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This user’s manual is for the Siemens Energy & Automation SITRANS P Series DSIII Pressure
Transmitters.
All information needed to bench test, install, configure, calibrate, and service a transmitter is included in
this user’s manual.
IMPORTANT
Save this user’s manual. It should be available to those installing, configuring,

operating, and servicing the described pressure transmitters.
1.1 CONTENTS
The user’s manual consists of a table of contents, ten sections, and three appendices. Following the table
of contents is a subsection that contains important information about the symbols that can appear in this
user’s manual and on the transmitter. The subsection also has statements about installing and servicing the
transmitter. A brief description of each major section and appendices follows.
Section 1, Introduction, describes each section in the manual and provides a brief description of the
SITRANS P Series DSIII Pressure Transmitter line. A product support section has telephone, fax, E-mail,
and Internet contact information.
Section 2, Model 275 Universal HART Communicator, describes use of the HART Communicator to test,
configure, and calibrate a transmitter.
Section 3, Pre-Installation Test, provides procedures to perform a bench test of the transmitter to ensure
proper operation of all transmitter functions. Start-up configuration is described here.
Section 4, Installation, furnishes specific information for mechanical and electrical installation of the
transmitter.
Section 5, Post-Installation Test, describes how to confirm that the transmitter has been installed correctly
- sometimes referred to as commissioning.
Section 6, On-Line Configuration and Operation, details local configuration using the magnetic
pushbuttons and remote configuration using the HART Communicator. Local operation and remote
operation of the transmitter are described.
Section 7, Calibration and Maintenance, provides references to calibration procedures for analog and
digital modes and to a zeroing procedure for mounting position. It also furnishes preventive maintenance,
troubleshooting, and assembly replacement procedures.
Section 8, Circuit Description, contains an assembly-level circuit description to support transmitter

servicing.
Section 9, Model Designations and Specifications, has tables that correlate rating plate model numbers to
transmitter physical configurations. This section also contains an accessory list and several service parts
lists. Detailed mechanical, functional, performance, and environmental specifications are provided, as are
dimension drawings of the transmitter. Hazardous area certifications are listed.
September 2004 1-1

Introduction UMSITRPDS3-1
Section 10, Glossary, contains definitions of various transmitter-related terms.
Appendix A, Online Configuration Map, is used to help navigate HART/transmitter menus during remote
configuration and operation of the transmitter.
Appendix B, Hazardous Area Installations, contains control drawings and other information needed for
installation in a hazardous area.
Appendix C, Elevation and Suppression Corrections, explains how to perform elevation and suppression
calculations necessary for certain liquid level gauging applications.
Warranty contains the product warranty statements and information concerning servicing of the product
during the warranty period.
1.2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SITRANS P Series DSIII transmitters provide reliable, accurate, stable, and cost-effective measurement
of differential, absolute, and gauge pressure and liquid level.
The transmitter is a microcontroller-based, self-contained pressure-to-current transducer. A measuring

cell senses the applied process pressure and provides an analog output signal that is proportional to
applied pressure. An analog-to-digital converter produces a digital signal for the microcontroller. The
microcontroller modifies and corrects the signal for linearity and temperature, and a digital-to-analog
converter produces a 4-20 milliampere output signal for the loop.
The transmitter can be installed quickly and easily using one of the optional mounting brackets.
Illustrations showing mounting hardware and dimensions are provided in this manual. Measuring cell
construction determines a transmitter’s physical dimensions and mechanical installation. Note that a given
sensor construction can involve one or more measurement methods, as shown in Table 1-1.
TABLE 1-1 Measurements, Models and Figure References
Measurement Model And Measuring Cell Construction Refer To

Absolute or Gauge Pressure 7MF4033, Gauge Construction Figures 1-1, 4-3, 4-4, 4-
10, 4-12, 9-1 and 9-2
7MF4233, Gauge Construction
7MF4333, Differential Construction
Differential Pressure 7MF4433, Differential Construction Figures 1-2, 1-3, 4-1, 4-
2, 4-11, 4-12, 9-2, and 9-
7MF4533, Differential Construction
3
Liquid Level (Flange) 7MF4633, Flange Construction Figures 1-4, 4-5, and 9-4
7MF4912, Flange
Figures 1-1 through 1-4 show the various transmitter models and constructions. They also show common
transmitter mounting methods. The mounting brackets shown are optional.
1-2 September 2004

1 Process connection: 6 Hinged access cover over magnetic

1/2-NPT, connection shank G1/2A pushbuttons
Oval flange 7 Mounting bracket, optional
2 Blanking plug 8 Tag plate
3 Electrical connection: 9 Approval plate; Rating plate on other side
Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 10 Enclosure ground screw
Screwed gland 1/2-14NPT 11 Enclosure setscrew
4 Field terminals; remove enclosure cap for 12 Enclosure rotation limits
access 13 Enclosure rotation reference arrow; see
5 Electronics module and display; remove Section 4 for details
enclosure cap for access
This Figure is for Models 7MF4033 and
7MF4233
FIGURE 1-1 Gauge Construction, Pressure and Absolute Pressure Models
September 2004 1-3

1 Process Connection 1/4-18NPT for absolute 10 Side vent for measuring gas (supplement H02)
pressure + side 11 Mounting bracket, optional
2 Mounting thread M10, M12 or 7/16-20UNF 12 Enclosure setscrew
3 Blanking plug 13 Enclosure rotation limits (see 14 reference
4 Electrical connection: arrow)
Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 14 Enclosure rotation reference arrow; see
Screwed gland 1/2-14NPT Section 4 for details
5 Field terminals; remove enclosure cap for 15 Tag plate
access 16 Approval plate; Rating plate on other side
6 Electronics module and display; remove 17 Enclosure ground screw
enclosure cap for access
7 Hinged access cover over magnetic This Figure is for Models 7MF4333, 7MF4433,
pushbuttons and 7MF4533.
8 Sealing screw
9 Side vent for measuring liquid
FIGURE 1-2 Differential Construction; Differential, Flow, and Absolute Models
1-4 September 2004

1 Process connection 1/4-18NPT 10 Blanking plug

Mounting thread M10 or 7/16-20UMF 11 Access cover over magnetic pushbuttons
2 Field terminals; remove enclosure cap for 12 Electrical connection:
3 access M20 x 1.5
Electronics module and display; remove 1/2-14NPT
4 enclosure cap for access 13 Tag plate
Sealing screw 14 Approval plate; Rating plate on other side
5 Enclosure setscrew 15 Enclosure ground screw
6 Enclosure rotation limits; enclosure
7 rotation reference arrow on neck (see This Figure is for Models 7MF4433 and
Section 4 for details) 7MF4533 with H03 option.
FIGURE 1-3 Differential Pressure and Flow Models with H03 Option
September 2004 1-5

1 Process connection at low side 1/4-18NPT 7 Access cover to magnetic pushbuttons

2 Mounting thread M10, M12, or 7/16-20UNF 8 Sealing screw with valve
3 Blanking plug 9 Enclosure setscrew
4 Electrical connection: 10 Enclosure rotation limits
M20 x1.5 11 Enclosure rotation reference arrow (not
1/2-14NPT shown; see Section 4 for details)
5 Field terminals; remove enclosure cap for 12 Tag plate
access 13 Rating plate; approval plate on other side
6 Electronics module and display; remove
enclosure cap for access This Figure is for Models 7MF4633 and
7MF4912
FIGURE 1-4 Flanged Liquid Level Models
1-6 September 2004

A transmitter can operate in either analog mode or digital mode, as discussed in the following paragraphs.
Analog Mode
A single transmitter is connected to a controller, recorder, or other field device. A loop known as a Point-
to-Point network interconnects the instruments. Figure 1-5shows a traditional application.
Process Automation Controller
MG00369b
2-Wire 2-Wire
4-20 mA 4-20 mA
Differential
Transmitter I/P
Model 773
Model 353
Flow
FIGURE 1-5 Traditional Application
The HART® (Highway Addressable Remote Transducer) protocol is used for communication between the
transmitter and a HART Communicator, a personal computer running configuration software, or another
remote device. This is done by superimposing the HART digital signal on the analog current. HART
communications can be used to transfer a new or edited configuration, remotely monitor the process
variable, or service a transmitter.
Digital Mode
Up to 15 transmitters can be parallel connected to a Multi-Drop network using only shielded, twisted-pair
cable. The HART protocol provides communication between the transmitters and a HART-compatible
controller, recorder, or other device. Each transmitter is identified by a unique network address that is
selected during configuration.
Display, Magnetic Pushbuttons, and Loop Connections
The optional display (Figure 1-6) permits local viewing of input and output variables and status messages,
and it simplifies local configuration. Local configuration is performed using three magnetic pushbuttons
that are found beneath an access cover in the transmitter housing. Section 6 On-Line Configuration and
Operation describes use of the display and magnetic pushbuttons.
Loop connections are made to a terminal assembly with three screw terminals (Figure 1-7). The assembly
is located within the transmitter enclosure and is accessed by removing the enclosure cap adjacent to
FIELD TERMINALS on the enclosure. The terminal assembly also has terminals to connect an external
digital milliammeter for loop troubleshooting and transmitter calibration. Loop wiring is shown in Section
4 Installation.
An enclosure ground connection is located on the housing beneath the field terminal enclosure cap. The
enclosure should always be grounded by a wire connected from this terminal to an earth ground, even
when a ground may be provided by metal conduit protecting the loop wiring.
September 2004 1-7

4 4
2
1 1
+ + _
3 +
-4-20mA+
MG00364b
MG00364b
3
1 Digital display, optional 1 Field terminals for analog output

2 Magnetic pushbutton access cover 2 External digital milliammeter terminals
3 Enclosure cap 3 Enclosure ground
4 Electrical entrances; plug unused entrance
FIGURE 1-6 Display FIGURE 1-7 Field Terminals
Transmitters have an intrinsically safe, explosion proof, NEMA 4x (IP67/68), field mountable, hardened
enclosure. Electrical conduit connections are 1/2-14 NPT or M20 x 1.5. All process wetted materials are
316 stainless steel or better. The flush-mount process connection of the liquid level model is compatible
with standard ANSI and metric flange sizes for tanks and pipes.
1-8 September 2004

1.3 RATING, APPROVAL, AND TAG PLATES
These plates are fastened to the outside of the transmitter

enclosure, as shown at right. The rating plate shows that
transmitter’s model number, serial number, and performance
data. The approval plate shows that transmitter’s approval and
certification data. Always refer to these plates to confirm the
model number, performance data and approval and certification
data before installing or servicing a transmitter. Representative + +
plates are shown below.
1 2
The tag plate is fastened with two screws so it can be
removed for engraving. 3
MG00353a
1 Rating plate
2 Approval plate
3 Tag plate
SIEMENS SIEMENS
D-76181 Karlsruhe D-76181 Karlsruhe
1
SITRANS P SITRANS P
Transmitter for diff. pressure 2 (XP/DIP) or (IS)
FM
CL I ZN 0/1 AEX ia IIC T4..T6
7MF4433-1DA20-1HC6-Z CL I,II,II DIV 1 ABCKEFB T4..T6 APPROVED
A01+B11+Y01
Feb. Nr. N1-M831-9292402 Per Control Dwg. A5E00072770A
Vi < 30V : Ii < 100 mA : Pi < 0.75 W
VH :DC 10.5-45V (not intr. safe) outp.: 4-20 mA Ci < 6 nF : Li < 0.4 mH
Mat.: Connec. Diaphr. O-ring Filling

1.4408 1.4404 FPM Siliconoil (NI) CL 1 DIV 2 ABCD T4..T6
CL II DIV 2 GP FB, CL III
Measuring span : 2.5 - 250 mbar
Rated pressure : PN 160 Vmax = 30 V
MG00384a
MG00384a
Type of protection IP 65 Ta - T4: -40..85ºC ; T6: -40..60ºC

ENCL Type 4X
Made in USA FW: 11.02.03 HW: 02.05.01
Rating Plate Approval Plate
1 Model number
2 Serial number
1.4 CONFIGURATION
A transmitter must be configured before use. Each transmitter is shipped with either a default
configuration or, if specified at time of order, a custom configuration defined by the user. The default
configuration may need to be edited before the transmitter is used in a loop. The configuration is stored
within the transmitter in a non-volatile memory.
A configuration can be created or edited locally at the transmitter’s magnetic pushbuttons or remotely
using the Model 275 HART Communicator.
Note: If using a Model 375 Field Communicator, see the inside of the front
cover of this manual.
September 2004 1-9

1.5 PRODUCT SUPPORT
This section provides the Internet site addresses, e-mail addresses, telephone
numbers, and related information for customers to access Siemens product support.
When contacting Siemens for support:

• Please have complete product information at hand:
• For hardware, this information is provided on the product nameplate (part
number or model number, serial number, and/or version).
• For most software, this information is given in the Help > About screen.
• If there is a problem with product operation:
• Is the problem intermittent or repeatable? What symptoms have been observed?
• What steps, configuration changes, loop modifications, etc. were performed before the problem
occurred?
• What status messages, error messages, or LED indications are displayed?
• What troubleshooting steps have been performed?
• Is the installation environment (e.g. temperature, humidity) within the product’s specified
operating parameters? For software, does the PC meet or exceed the minimum requirements (e.g.
processor, memory, operating system)?
• A copy of the product Service Instruction, User’s Manual, or other technical literature should be at
hand. The Siemens public Internet site (see the table) has current revisions of technical literature, in
Portable Document Format, for downloading.
• To send an instrument to Siemens for repair, request a Return Material Authorization (RMA).
IMPORTANT
An instrument must be thoroughly cleaned (decontaminated) to remove any process materials,

hazardous materials, or blood born pathogens prior to return for repair. Read and complete the
Siemens RMA form(s).
TABLE 1.1 Contact Information

Telephone +1 800 569 2132, option 2 for Siemens-Moore
brand instruments
Fax +1 215 283 6358
NORTH AMERICA E-mail PITechSupp@sea.siemens.com
Hours of Operation 8 a.m. to 6 p.m. eastern time
Monday – Friday (except holidays)
Public Internet Site www.sea.siemens.com/ia/
Repair Service +1 215 646 7400 extension 4993
For contact information outside North America, visit the Siemens public Internet site (see the table),
locate Customer Support, and click on Siemens & Moore Brand Instrumentation.
Q
1-10 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Model 275 Universal Hart Communicator
2.0 MODEL 275 UNIVERSAL HART COMMUNICATOR

The Model 275 Universal HART Communicator is a handheld interface that provides a common
communication link to SITRANS P transmitters and other HART-compatible instruments.
This section describes HART Communicator connections, liquid crystal display, keypad, and on-line and
off-line menus. It also provides overviews of many Communicator functions. The Communicator is
shown in Figure 2-1. For information about the Communicator’s battery pack, Memory Module, Data
Pack, and maintenance procedures, refer to the manual supplied with the Communicator.
2.1 INTRODUCTION
The HART Communicator connects to and communicates with a transmitter or other HART device using
a 4-20 mA loop, provided a minimum load resistance of 250Ω is present between the Communicator and
the power supply. The Communicator uses Bell 202 frequency-shift keying (FSK) to impose high-
frequency digital signals on a standard 4-20 mA current loop. Because no net energy is added to the loop,
HART communication does not disturb the 4-20 mA signal.
The Communicator can be used in hazardous and non-hazardous locations.
WARNING
Explosion can cause death or serious injury.
Before connecting the HART Communicator in an

explosive atmosphere, be sure that the instruments in
the loop are installed in accordance with intrinsically
safe or non-incendive field wiring practices.
Refer to the Communicator nameplate and the supplied

manual for certifications and approvals before
connecting, or making a connection to the serial port or
NiCad charger port on the Communicator.
2.2 COMMUNICATOR CONNECTIONS
The Communicator can interface with a transmitter from the control room, the instrument site, or any
wiring termination point in the loop. Connections are made through a supplied 40" (1m) cable (dual
banana plug to mini-hook test clips). The connection panel also may have a jack for the optional NiCad
charger, and it has a serial port for a future connection to a personal computer (PC).
To interface with a transmitter or other HART device, connect the HART Communicator in parallel with
the instrument or load resistor. The connections are non-polar. For intrinsically safe FM and CSA wiring
connections, see the manual supplied with the Communicator.
Figure 2-2 illustrates typical wiring connections between the HART Communicator and a loop with a
transmitter or other HART-compatible device in a loop. The Communicator is quickly connected into a
transmitter loop.
September 2004 2-1

Model 275 Universal Hart Communicator UMSITRPDS3-1
9 10
11
12
7 3
F1 F2 F3 F4
HART Communicator
4
I
O
ABC DEF GHI

1 2 3
8 JKL MNO PQR
5
4 5 6
STU VWX YZ/
7 8 9
MG00360a
#%& < > * :+

0 . _
6
1 Model 275 Universal HART Communicator

2 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 8 lines, 21 characters per line
3 Function Keys (softkeys), software defined
4 Action Keys – ON/OFF (I/O), Up Arrow, Quick Access Key (>>>), Previous Menu (Back, left arrow),
Down Arrow, Select (Forward, right arrow)
5 Alphanumeric Keys (keypad number sequence may be different from that shown)
6 Shift Keys – Use to select alphabetic and other characters above a number, period, or dash.
7 Communicator Nameplate – On back of device. See nameplate for certifications and approvals
before connecting in a hazardous location.
8 Communicator model number and serial number on back
9 Connection panel.
10 Non-polar loop connection; dual banana plug
11 Serial port for PC connection; DB9
12 NiCad Charger Jack, optional
FIGURE 2-1 Model 275 Universal HART Communicator
Note: If using a Model 375 Field Communicator, see the

inside of the front cover of this manual.
2-2 September 2004

Current Sense Circuit

Resistor 250 to Junction
MG00359a
1100; See Note 3
Range Resistor Non-Hazardous Hazardous

250, typical Location Location
Controller,
+ Transmitter
Recorder, or
Other 1-5 Vdc Terminals
Device; See _
Note 2
_
+
- +
4-20 mA
See Note 4
I I I
O O O
See
Note 1
I
See
O
Note 1
Notes:
1 HART Communicator Connections:

Non-hazardous location – Connect as shown above.
Hazardous location – Refer to Communicator nameplate and the manual supplied with the
Communicator for certifications and approvals before connecting.
The HART Communicator is a non-polar device.
2 The System Power Supply may be part of the host input device or a separate device.
3 Network resistance equals the sum of the barrier resistances and the current sense resistor.
Minimum value is 250Ω; maximum value is 1100Ω.
4 Supply and return barriers are shown. Interconnect all cable shields and ground only at the barriers.
FIGURE 2-2 HART Communicator Connections to a Transmitter Loop
September 2004 2-3

2.3 CONTROLS OVERVIEW
As shown in Figure 2-1, the front of the HART Communicator has five major functional areas: liquid
crystal display (LCD), function keys, action keys, alphanumeric keys, and shift keys. The next five
sections describe how each of these functional areas is used to enter commands and display data.
2.3.1 Liquid Crystal Display
The liquid crystal display (LCD) is an 8-line by 21-character display that provides communication
between the user and a connected device. When the HART Communicator is connected to a SITRANS P
transmitter or other HART-compatible device, the top line of the Online menu displays the model name
of the device and its tag. A typical display is shown below. The actual display content can vary with the
device type and manufacturer.
SITRANS P
Online Í]
1->Pres Note: If using a Model 375 Field
2 Type Communicator, see the inside of
3 Device setup the front cover of this manual.
HELP |SAVE
The bottom line of each menu is reserved for dynamic labels for the software-defined function keys, F1-
F4, which are found directly below the display. More information on software-defined function keys is
given in the next section.
2.3.2 Software-Defined Function Keys
The four software-defined function keys (softkeys), located below the LCD and marked F1 through F4,
are used to perform software functions as indicated by the dynamic labels. Pressing the function key
immediately beneath a label activates the displayed function.
The label appearing above a function key indicates the function of that key for the current menu. For
example, in menus providing access to on-line help, the HELP label appears above the F1 key. In menus
providing access to the Online menu, the HOME label appears above the F3 key. Table 2-1 lists these
labels and describes what happens when each function key is pressed.
2-4 September 2004

TABLE 2-1 Function Keys with Their Labels and Actions Performed
F1 F2 F3 F4
HELP ON/OFF ABORT OK
Access on-line help Activate or deactivate a Terminate current task Acknowledge
bit-enumerated binary information on the
variable LCD
RETRY DEL ESC ENTER
Try to reestablish Delete current Leave a value Accept user-entered
communication character or Quick unchanged data
Access Key menu item
EXIT SEND QUIT EXIT
Leave the current menu Send configuration Terminate session Leave the current menu
data to device because of a
communication error
YES PGUP PGDN NO
Answer to yes/no Move up one help Move down one help Answer to yes/no
question screen screen question
ALL PREV NEXT ONE
Include current Quick Go to previous Go to next message in Include Quick Access
Access Key item on message in a list of a list of messages Key item for one
Quick Access Key messages device
menu for all devices
NEXT SAVE HOME
Go to the next variable Save information to Go the top menu in the
in off-line edit Communicator device description
FILTR MARK BACK
Open customization Toggle marked Go back to the menu
menu to sort variable in from which HOME
configurations configuration to be sent was pressed
to a field device
XPAND EDIT
Opens detailed Edit a variable value
configuration
information
CMPRS ADD
Closes detailed Add current item to
configuration Quick Access Key
information menu
September 2004 2-5

2.3.3 Action Keys
Directly beneath the LCD and software-defined function keys are six blue, white, and black action keys.
Each has a specific function as described below:
ON/OFF KEY – Use to power-up the Communicator. When the Communicator is turned on,
I it automatically searches for a HART-compatible device on the 4-20 mA loop. If no device is
O found, the Communicator displays the Main menu:
HART Communicator
1ÎOffline
2 Online
3 Frequency device
4 Utility
If a SITRANS P transmitter is found, the Communicator displays the Online menu:
SITRANS P
Online Í]
1ÎPres
2 Type
3 Device setup
HELP |SAVE
UP ARROW KEY – Use to move the cursor up through a menu or list of options or to scroll
through lists of available characters when editing fields that accept both alpha and numeric
data.
DOWN ARROW KEY – Use to move the cursor through a menu or a list of options or to
scroll through lists of available characters when editing fields that accept alpha and numeric
data.
LEFT ARROW/PREVIOUS MENU KEY – Use to move the cursor to the left or back to the
previous menu.
RIGHT ARROW/SELECT KEY – Use to move the cursor to the right or to select a menu
option.
QUICK ACCESS KEY (HOT KEY) – When the Communicator is on and connected to a
HART-compatible device, pressing the Quick Access Key instantly displays the Quick Access
Key menu of user-defined options. When the Communicator is off and the Quick Access Key
is pressed, the Communicator automatically powers-up and displays the Quick Access Key
menu.
See Section 2.6 for more information on using the Quick Access Key.
2-6 September 2004

Important
When performing certain operations, the message “OFF KEY DISABLED”

indicates that the Communicator cannot be turned off. This feature helps prevent
accidental shutoff of the Communicator while the output of a device is fixed or a
device variable is being edited.
2.3.4 Alphanumeric and Shift Keys
The alphanumeric keys perform two functions: (1) rapid selection of menu options and (2) data entry. The
shift keys located below the alphanumeric keys on the keypad are used during data entry to select from
among the characters available above each number.
2.3.4.1 Rapid Selection of Menu Options
From any menu, use the keypad to select available options in two ways. First, use the UP or DOWN
arrow keys, followed by the RIGHT ARROW/SELECT key, to access available options displayed on the
LCD.
As an alternative, use the rapid select feature. Simply press the number on the alphanumeric keypad that
corresponds to the desired menu option. For example, to quickly access the Utility menu from the Main
menu, simply press “4” on the keypad.
2.3.4.2 Data Entry
Some menus require data entry. Use the alphanumeric and shift keys to enter all alphanumeric
information into the HART Communicator. Pressing an alphanumeric key alone while editing causes the
large character in the center of the key (number 0-9, decimal point, or dash) to be entered.
Pressing and releasing a shift key activates shift and causes the appropriate arrow icon (É, Ç, or Ê) to
appear in the upper right-hand corner of the LCD. When shift is activated, the indicated alpha characters
or symbols are entered when the keypad is used.
Example
To enter a number, such as “7,” simply press the number key.
To enter one of the small characters appearing above the large numeral (i.e., a letter, space, or
mathematical symbol), first press and release the corresponding shift key at the bottom of the keypad,
then press the desired alphanumeric key. To enter the letter “E,” press and release the middle shift key,
then press the number “2” key.
To deactivate a shift key without entering a letter, space, or mathematical symbol, simply press that shift
key again.
September 2004 2-7

2.4 GETTING TO KNOW THE COMMUNICATOR
The HART Communicator operates either on-line or off-line. Off-line operation is used to create or edit a
configuration that can then be downloaded to a HART device, such as a transmitter. On-line operation is
used to download a configuration to a HART device, upload a configuration, edit HART device operating
parameters, and monitor process values.
For off-line operation, the Communicator need not be connected to a HART device. On-line operation
requires a connection to a powered HART device.
The menu that appears first when the Communicator is turned on depends on whether the Communicator
is connected to a powered HART device.
• Communicator not connected - Main menu (off-line operation)
• Communicator connected - Online menu (on-line operation)
To work off-line when connected to a powered loop, access the Main menu from the Online menu by
pressing the LEFT ARROW/PREVIOUS MENU key.
Note
Communicator internal operation is controlled by firmware. Consequently,

operation will depend upon the firmware version and the installed device drivers,
as discussed in this section.
2.4.1 Display Icons
Several different symbols (icons) appear on the LCD to show the state of the Communicator and provide
visible response to actions of the user. Figure 2-3 shows the display icons and how they relate to keypad
functions.
HART Communication
( indicates connected
device is configured in
the burst mode)
HART Communicator Low Battery

Device Info
2 Dev Type
Access Additional 3 Dev ID 0
4 Tag
Menu Items
5 MM/DD/YY 10/10/10 Access
6 Write Protect Yes Previous
Menu
X03034S1
FIGURE 2-3 HART Communicator Display Icons
2-8 September 2004

2.4.2 Menu Structure
The HART Communicator uses a hierarchical menu structure. That is, high-level menus are accessed
first, and they provide access to lower-level menus. This structure groups related functions together and
minimizes the number of options displayed at once.
To become familiar with the menu structure, perform the following actions:
1. With the Communicator off-line (not attached to any devices), press the ON/OFF key to turn the
Communicator on. The Communicator will perform a self-test routine and display the firmware
revision level installed in the Communicator. It will then display a “Polling?” query. Press NO (F4) to
go to the Main menu.
2. The cursor (Î) will be positioned at “1 Offline” on the Main menu. Access the Utility menu by
pressing the DOWN arrow key three times, then pressing the RIGHT ARROW/SELECT key. The
display changes to show the Utility menu.
3. Access the Configure Communicator menu from the Utility menu by pressing the RIGHT
ARROW/SELECT key. The display changes to show the Configure Communicator menu.
4. Access the Contrast menu by pressing the DOWN arrow once, then pressing the RIGHT
ARROW/SELECT key. The display shows a message explaining how to adjust the LCD contrast.
5. Press ESC (F3) to return to the Configure Communicator menu.
6. Press the LEFT ARROW/PREVIOUS MENU key two times to return to the Main menu.
7. Press the ON/OFF key to turn the Communicator off.
2.4.3 Reviewing Installed Devices
For the HART Communicator to recognize a specific HART-compatible device, it must contain a
description for that device. Communicator device descriptions for Moore and Siemens products are listed
in Table 2-2. Device descriptions for many other HART-compatible devices from leading manufacturers
are included but not listed in the table.
Communicator firmware also contains a “generic” device description, which allows limited access to most
HART devices when no device description for that specific product is included.
To review the currently installed device descriptions:

1. Turn on the Communicator (off-line) to display the Main Menu.
2. In the Main menu, press “4 Utility” on the keypad.
3. In the Utility menu, press “5 Simulation” on the keypad. The LCD shows the Manufacturer menu,
which contains a list of manufacturers whose device descriptions are installed in the Communicator.
4. Press the DOWN arrow to highlight SIEMENS (or other manufacturer). Press the RIGHT
ARROW/SELECT key to reveal the Model menu, which lists the device descriptions currently
installed in the Communicator (see Table 2-2).
5. To end the review of devices, press the LEFT ARROW/PREVIOUS MENU key three times.
6. Turn off the Communicator or proceed to the next section.
September 2004 2-9

TABLE 2-2 Communicator Firmware Device Descriptions, Rev. F2.2
MODEL FIELD DESCRIPTION APPROXIMATE VINTAGE1

DEVICE
REVISION
(Siemens) Moore Menu2

760D Dev V2, DD V1 760D Valve Positioner ---
340A Dev V1, DD V1 340 Transmitter (pushbutton design) 8/90 - 8/94, Model #s 340__A…
340A Type 6 Dev V1, DD V1 340 Transmitter (pushbutton design) 8/94 - 8/96, Model #s 340__A…
Dev V2, DD V1 340 Transmitter (magnetic switch Present, Model #s 340__B…
design)
340B Dev V1, DD V1 340 Transmitter-Controllers 8/90 - 8/96, Model #s 340__B…
(pushbutton design)
340S Dev V1, DD V1 340 Transmitter ---
341 Type 5 Dev V1, DD V1 341 Transmitter 8/94 - Present, Model #s 341…
343 Dev V1, DD V1 343 Temperature Transmitter ---
344 Dev V1, DD V1 344 Transmitter-Controller 8/90 - 8/94 Model #s 344…
Dev V2, DD V1 344 Transmitter-Controller 8/90 - Present, Model #s 344…
345 Dev V1, DD V1 345 Transmitter-Controller 8/99 - Present
Siemens Menu
SITRANS P DS3 Dev V2, DD V1 Siemens DS3 Pressure Transmitter 12/00 - Present
Rosemount
Generic Dev V5, DD V4 Generic ---
Notes:
1
Always verify the model and field device revision for the device at hand. For the device model, refer to
the Rating Plate (Nameplate). Refer to Appendix A Online Configuration Map to access the “Revision
Numbers” menu using the HART Communicator.
2
Menu refers to the HART Communicator’s “Manufacturer” screen.
2-10 September 2004

2.5 MAIN MENU
The Main menu is shown at right. To access the Main menu: HART Communicator
1->Offline
Communicator not connected to a HART device – Press 2 Online
the Communicator’s ON/OFF key, the first menu to appear 3 Frequency Device
after powering up is a “Poll?” query. Since a device is not 4 Utility
connected, press NO (F4). The Main menu (at right) will
then appear.
Communicator connected to a powered HART device –

Press the Communicator’s ON/OFF key, the Online menu
appears. To access the Main menu, press the LEFT
ARROW/PREVIOUS MENU key until the Main menu
appears. Alternatively, press HOME (F3) to display the
Online menu, followed by the LEFT ARROW/PREVIOUS
MENU key to display the Main menu.
In the Main menu, access an additional menu by either:

• Moving the cursor to the selection using the UP or DOWN arrow key, followed by pressing the
RIGHT ARROW/SELECT key
• Pressing the appropriate number (1-4) on the alphanumeric keypad.
September 2004 2-11

2.5.1 Offline Menu
The Offline menu provides access to two other menus: New Configuration and Saved Configuration.
These two configuration menus can be used without connecting to a HART-compatible device, but it is
not possible to send saved data to a device if no device is connected.
In the Main menu, press “1 Offline” on the keypad or the RIGHT ARROW/SELECT key to access the
Offline menu. The complete menu tree for the Offline Menu is shown in Figure 2-4.
Main Menu 1 New 1 Moore Products List of Models Field Device From a Blank
1 Offline Configuration 2 Rosemount Revision Template
3 Siemens 1 Mark all
2 Unmark all
3 Edit individually >
4 Save as... 1 Location
2 Name
3 Data type
2 Save 1 Module Contents List of 1 Edit 1 Mark all

Configuration 2 Data Pack Configurations 2 Unmark all
Contents 3 Edit individually >
3 PC 4 Save as... 1 Location
2 Copy to... 2 Name
3 Send 3 Data type
4 Print
5 Delete
6 Rename
7 Compare
2 Online
3 Frequency Note: > = See Table 2-3 for additional menu
Device options
4 Utility
FIGURE 2-4 Offline Menu Map
TABLE 2-3 Offline Menu Map Continued, “Edit individually” Options1
Tag (type)2 Alarm URV (type) Flange type (select) Extension length (select)
Descriptor (type) Pres xfer function (select) Flange material (select) Electrical connection (select)
Date (type) Pressure damp (type) O ring material (select) Local keys ctrl mod (select)
Pressure unit (select) AO alarm type (select) Process flange bolt (select) Bargraph (select)
Pressure LRV (type) Alarm LRV (type) DrainVent / plug mat (select) Unit tracking (select)
Pressure URV (type) Alarm URV (type) DrainVent / plug POS (select) Local display unit (select)
Pres transfer function (select) Upper AO limit (type) RS type (select) Measuring speed (select)
Pressure damp (type) Lower AO limit (type) RS isoltr material (select) Final assembly num (type)
AO alarm type (select) Meter type (select) RS fill fluid (select)
Alarm LRV (type) Process connection (select) Num remote seal (select)
Notes:
1. Menu sequence is read top to bottom, left to right.
2. (type) = type a value or text; (select) = select from the list offered.
2-12 September 2004

2.5.1.1 New Configuration
This option is used to compile a custom set of device configuration data for downloading later to one or
more HART-compatible devices. Downloading the same data to multiple devices ensures that they all
store identical configuration data.
Use the following steps to compile off-line, new device configuration data:
1. From the Main menu, press “1” to access the Offline menu. HART Communicator
Offline Í]
2. Press “1” to enter a new configuration. The Manufacturer 1->New configuration
menu appears. 2 Saved configuration
3. Choose a manufacturer by scrolling to the manufacturer
name with the DOWN arrow, then pressing RIGHT
ARROW/SELECT. For a SITRANS P transmitter, choose HELP
Siemens. The Model menu appears.
4. From the Model menu, choose a device by scrolling through
the list, then pressing RIGHT ARROW/SELECT. The Field
Device Revision (Fld dev rev) menu appears.
The Field Device Revision menu contains the currently

installed software revisions for the field device and device
descriptions (DD) for the model selected from the Model
menu.
Select the software revision (RIGHT ARROW/SELECT or Unnamed

number) to access the Blank Template menu (at right). To From Blank Template Í]
display the software revision for a particular device, connect 1->Mark all
the Communicator to the device and follow instructions 2 Unmark all
given in the device manual. 3 Edit individually
4 Save as...
To find the field device revision (compatible device
description) for a SITRANS P transmitter: HELP |SAVE
1. Connect the Communicator to the transmitter.

2. Apply power to the transmitter.
3. Turn on the Communicator.
4. In the Online menu, select “3 Device Setup.”
5. In the Device Setup menu, select “4 Detailed Setup.”
6. In the Detailed setup menu, select “4 Device
Information.”
7. In the Device Information menu, select “6 Revision
numbers.” Revision numbers for the Communicator and
the transmitter will be listed.
September 2004 2-13

5. With the Blank Template menu displayed, choose from the

options available, as follows:
Mark All – Flags (selects) all configurable variables for

sending to a connected HART-compatible device.
Unmark All – Remove the flags from all configurable

variables in the configuration. Unmarked configuration
variables are not sent to a connected device.
Edit Individually – Open the Edit individually menu (at Unnamed

right). Edit individually
Tag
Example ********
The Edit individually menu permits the user to type or
change a configuration parameter. For example, to add a tag, Not marked to send
press the EDIT function key (F3) to and type the tagname. NEXT |MARK |EDIT |EXIT
Then press NEXT to move to the next configurable
parameter.
Save As. . .
Selecting the Save As option allows a new configuration to
be saved to either the Memory Module or the Data Pack.
The Memory Module holds up to 10 typical configurations,

and contains the operating system software and device
application software in non-volatile memory. The Data Pack
stores up to 100 typical configurations in nonvolatile,
removable memory.
Example
From the Offline menu, choose 1 New configuration. This

displays the Manufacturer menu. Choose a device, then
choose a model from the Model menu. Choose a software
revision from the Fld dev rev menu.
The Communicator creates a configuration and displays the Unnamed

Blank Template menu. Choose Save as... to display the Save
Save as... Í]
as... menu (at right). With the Location highlighted, press the 1->Location Module
SAVE (F2) function key to save the configuration. 2 Name
3 Data Type Standard
If the location highlighted is the Module, but the
configuration is to be stored in the Data Pack, or vice versa,
press the RIGHT ARROW/SELECT key to display the HELP|SAVE
Location menu. Choose either Module or Data Pack by
pressing ENTER (F4). This displays the Save as... menu
again. Press SAVE (F2) to save the configuration in the
desired location.
2-14 September 2004

The Save As... menu also is used to enter or edit the Unnamed
configuration Name and Data Type. To name a Name
configuration, simply choose option 2, then use the keypad UNNAMED
with shift keys to enter the name as shown at right. MYNAME#1
When the Save As... menu is displayed, one of the options –

Standard, Partial, or Full – will be shown. To change the
option, move the cursor to the Data Type ______ line of the HELP|SAVE
Save As... menu and press the RIGHT ARROW/SELECT
key to display the Data Type menu (below right).
Data Type Standard refers to all user-editable variables in a Unnamed

device configuration. Data Type Partial refers to only the Data Type
marked editable variables. Data Type Full refers to a all Standard
device variables, whether user-editable or not. In general, it Standard
is best to save as Data Type Standard. Saving as Data Type Partial
Full preserves a complete configuration for future reference. Full
When all changes have been made, save the new HELP ESC|ENTER
configuration to either the Memory Module or the Data Pack
and return to the Offline menu.
September 2004 2-15

2.5.1.2 Saved Configuration
The second option on the Offline menu is the Saved

Configuration menu, which permits access to previously stored HART Communicator
configuration data. Saved Configuration Í]
1. Press “2” from the Offline Menu to display the Saved 1->Module Contents
Configuration menu (at right). 2 Data Pack Contents
3 PC
2. Select either Module Contents or Data Pack Contents to
open stored configurations. Both storage locations list all
saved configurations by assigned Tag. See XPAND (below) HELP
for more configuration identification details. (Note: The PC
option shown on the menu is not operational with firmware
release 1.6.)
The Module Contents menu, which lists the configurations

HART Communicator
currently stored in the Memory Module, is shown at right.
Data Pack Contents Í]
The Data Pack menu is similar. Both give the user several
->PT101
options for handling and viewing configuration data, as
PT102
explained below. PT103S
PT104
FILTR
FILTR|XPAND
The FILTR function key (F1) opens a menu that provides
both Sort and Filter options. These options select only the
chosen configurations from all those stored. This is
particularly valuable for the Data Pack, which stores up to
100 configurations.
Sort allows unique device configurations to be grouped and

displayed by Tag, Descriptor, or user-assigned Name.
Use Filter to group and display configurations according to

certain characters within the chosen device identifier (Tag,
Descriptor, or Name). Filter is useful for selecting all the
tags from a certain area of the process or plant.
When setting up a Filter (see display at right), two wildcard HART Communicator
characters, the period (.) and the asterisk (*) are used. The Tag Filter
period replaces a single character of any value. The asterisk *
replaces one or more alphanumeric characters of any value. A-*-1
For example, if A-*-.1 is entered as the filter, the
configurations displayed will be all those with device tags
starting with A-, followed by any combination of characters HELP|DEL |ESC |ENTER
(e.g., XYZ, S2, 3R) followed by a dash, followed by any
single character (e.g., 1, D, M), and ending with a 1. Tags A-
M1-B1, A-N2-Z1, and A-SF-X1 would display, whereas the
tags BA53, PT101, and ATT48 would not.
2-16 September 2004

XPAND
The XPAND function key allows a user to view the Tag,

Descriptor, and Name for the configuration being edited or
viewed. Selecting Compress restores the previous
compressed display, which shows only the current Tag,
Descriptor, or Name.
3. With the Module Contents or Data Pack Contents menu PT118
displayed, press the RIGHT ARROW/SELECT key to open Saved Configuration Í]
the Saved Configuration menu for a device that was 1->Edit
highlighted (at right). 2 Copy to...
3 Send
Edit – displays the Edit menu, providing the same functions 4 Print
as described under “Edit individually” in Section 2.5.1.1. 5 Delete
When editing off-line, only stored data may be edited. HELP
Moreover, data stored as a Partial configuration must be
converted to a Standard configuration, then saved, prior to
editing.
Copy To... – specifies the storage location for a copy of the

configuration. Copy To... also provides a way to change the
configuration name.
Send – sends a saved configuration to a connected device.
Print – not implemented with firmware release 1.6.
Delete – removes a saved configuration from memory. A

confirmation message appears. Press Yes or No to complete the
function.
Rename – provides access to the configuration name editing

menu. After making name changes, enter and save the data to
return to the previous storage location menu.
Compare – compares a selected device configuration from a

stored location with other device configurations. The HART
Communicator can compare device types, variables, marked
lists, and other configuration parameters. Messages appear
indicating if the configurations compared are the same or
different.
September 2004 2-17

2.5.2 Online Menu
An operating transmitter can be tested and configured from the Online menu. Options available through
the SITRANS P Online menu are summarized in Figure 2-5 (Appendix A contains a more detailed menu
map). The Online menu is displayed when the Communicator contains a device description for the
connected HART device. If not, the Generic Online menu is displayed (see Figure 2-6).
The Online menu can also be accessed from the Main menu by pressing “2 Online.”
Online Menu
When the Communicator is connected to a powered transmitter, SITRANS P

it will poll the device to obtain: type, address, configuration, and Online Í]
process data. The Online menu shows the device type at the top 1->Press
of the display, if it is a supported device. SITRANS P-specific 2 Type
menu options are described in detail in Sections 3 and 6. 3 Device Setup
If a device description for the connected device is not in the

Communicator, contact the device manufacturer. The Com- HELP |SAVE
municator provides a generic interface so that functions common
to all HART-compatible devices can be accessed.
Generic Menu
The Generic Online menu (at right) is the first menu in the
generic interface. It displays critical, up-to-date device 1151:GENERIC ♥
information. Configuration parameters for the connected device Online Í]
may be accessed using the Device setup option. Figure 2-6 1->Device setup
shows the complete Generic Online menu tree. 2 PV 50.0000 inH2O
3 AO 12.000 mA
From the Online menu, use the options below to change device 4 LRV 0.0000 in H2O
configurations. 5 URV 100.0000 in H2O
SAVE
Device setup – provides access to the Device Setup menu.
Configurable device parameters common to all HART-
compatible devices can be accessed from this menu.
Primary Variable (PV) – the dynamic primary variable and the

related engineering unit. When the primary variable contains too
many characters to display on the Online menu, access the PV
menu to view the primary variable and related engineering units
by pressing “1.”
Analog Output (AO) – the dynamic output and the related

engineering units. The analog output is a signal on the 4-20 mA
scale that corresponds to the primary variable. When analog
output contains too many characters to display on the Online
menu, access the PV AO Menu to view the analog output and
related engineering unit by pressing “3.”
2-18 September 2004

1 Device setup* 1 Process variables 1 Pressure +

2 Percent range +
3 Analog output +
4 Sensor temperature +
2 Diagnostics and 1 Diagnosis 1 Min / max pointer >
service 2 Operating hours >
3 Warnings / alarms >
4 Status >
2 Simulation / Test 1 Simulation 1 Loop Test
2 Inputs >
2 Test 1 Self Test
2 Master reset
3 Control modes 1 Local keys ctrl mode
2 Write protect (status)
3 Set write protect
4 Trim 1 Position correction
2 Sensor trim >
3 Trim analog output >
5 Restore manufacturers 1 All trims
trims 2 DAC trims
3 Position correction
4 Sensor trim >
6 All measured values 1 Pressure +
2 Raw value
3 Sensor Temp +
4 El Temp +
5 AO +
3 Basic setup 1 Tag
2 Unit
4 LRV
5 URV
6 Damp
7 Transfer function
4 Detailed setup 1 Sensors 1 Pressure sensor 1 Pressure +
2 Unit
2 Temperature sensor 1 Sensor temperature +
2 El temperature +
2 Signal condition 1 Process variables >
3 Zero / span set >
4 Damping
5 Transfer function
6 Measuring speed
3 Output condition 1 Analog output +
2 HART output > Polling address and number of preambs
4 Device information 1 Ranges and limits > Module range, pressure USL and LSL,
and minimum span
2 Common device Manufacturer, model, measurement type,
information > etc.
3 Sensor information > Process connection, flange type, etc.
4 Remote seal > Seal type, material, fill, etc.
5 Local meter > Type, engineering units, bargraph
activation.
6 Revision numbers > Universal; field device DD,
software/firmware, and hardware.
5 Reviews > Step thru configuration
2 PV Notes: * = Reached from the Online menu by pressing 3 Device setup
3 AO > = Press to access lower level menu(s) not shown
4 LRV + = Active data displayed
5 URV HART Communicator, Rev 5
FIGURE 2-5 SITRANS P Online Menu Map
September 2004 2-19

1 Device setup 1 Process variables 1 Preset variable

2 Percent range
3 Analog output
2 Diagnostics and 1 Test device 1 Self test
service 2 Status
2 Loop test
3 Calibration 1 Rerange 1 Keypad input
2 Apply values
2 Trim analog output 1 D/A trim
2 Scaled D/A trim
3 Sensor trim
3 Basic setup 1 Tag
2 Unit
3 Range values
4 Device information 1 Date
2 Descriptor
3 Message
4 Write protect
5 Meter type
5 Transfer function
6 Damping
4 Detailed setup 1 Sensors 1 Process variables
2 Sensor service 1 Sensor trim
2 Characterize
3 Unit
2 Signal condition 1 Process variables
2 Range values
3 Unit
4 Transfer Function
5 Damping
3 Output condition 1 Process variables 1 Loop test
2 D/A trim
3 Scaled D/A trim
2 Analog output
3 AO alarm type
4 HART output 1 Poll address
2 Number of request preams
3 Burst mode
4 Burst option
4 Device Information 1 Field device info 1 Tag
2 Date
3 Descriptor
4 Message
5 Model
6 Write protect
7 Revision #’s
8 Final assembly #
9 Device ID
10 Distributor
2 Sensor information
3 Meter type
4 Self test
5 Review
2 PV
3 AO
4 LRV
5 URV
FIGURE 2-6 Generic Online Menu Map
2-20 September 2004

Lower Range Value (LRV) – the current lower range value and
the related engineering unit. When the lower range value
contains too many characters to display on the Online menu,
access the PV LRV Menu to view the lower range value and
Upper Range Value (URV) – the current upper range value and
the related engineering unit. When the lower range value
contains too many characters to display on the Online menu,
access the PV URV Menu to view the upper range value and
2.5.3 Frequency Device Menu
From the Main menu, press “3” to access the Frequency Device menu. This menu displays the frequency
output and corresponding pressure output for current-to-pressure devices. For SITRANS P transmitters,
the display frequency and pressure values are both “none.”
2.5.4 Utility Menu
From the Main menu, press “4” to access the Utility menu (at
HART Communicator
right). This menu provide functions that affect the operation of
Utility Í]
the Communicator, not the connected devices.
1->Configure Communic
2 System Information
2.5.4.1 Configure Communicator 3 Listen for PC
4 Storage Location
From the Utility Menu, press “1” to access the Configure 5 Simulation
Communicator menu (below right). Use this menu to set the 6 Selftest
polling, adjust the contrast of the LCD, set the Communicator
shutoff time, or set how many diagnostics messages to ignore HART Communicator
before a warning message is displayed. Configure Communica Í]
1->Polling
Use the Polling option to direct the HART Communicator to 2 Contrast
search for a connected device. The Communicator finds every 3 Off Time
device in the loop and lists them by tag number. If Polling is 4 Ignore diagnostics
Never Poll, then the Communicator will not find a connected 5 Delete configs
device. HELP
The Contrast menu is used to change the LCD contrast. Contrast

returns to the default value when the Communicator is turned
off.
Off Time is used to set the Communicator to turn off

automatically when not in use to conserve battery power.
The Communicator normally displays diagnostic messages from

a connected device. The Ignore Diagnostics option permits the
user to specify the number of messages to ignore so that
messages will not be displayed as often, extending the time
between displayed messages. The message count defaults to a
nominal count of 50 each time the Communicator is turned on.
September 2004 2-21

The Delete Configs option is used to delete all configurations

stored in the Module, data pack, or Hotkey menu.
2.5.4.2 System Information
From the Utility menu, press “2” to access the System HART Communicator
Information menu (at right). This menu can be used to provide System Information Í]
information on the motherboard (e.g., firmware revision 1->Motherboard
number), the module hardware and software characteristics, and 2 Module
the Data Pack EEPROM. 3 Data Pack
2.5.4.3 Listen for PC

HELP|DEL |ESC |ENTER
Not implemented in firmware release 1.6.
2.5.4.4 Storage Location
From the Utility menu, the Storage Location menu (at right) HART Communicator
provides access to data concerning the Memory Module or the
Storage location Í]
Data Pack. Information available through this menu includes a 1->Module
label for the Memory Module or Data Pack, a feature that 2 Data Pack
displays the total storage used (bytes) and the storage remaining 3 PC
(“free” bytes). The PC selection is not implemented in firmware
release 1.6.
HELP|DEL |ESC |ENTER
2.5.4.5 Simulation
The HART Communicator provides a mode that allows users to

simulate an on-line connection to a HART-compatible device
without connecting to the device. The simulation mode is a
training tool that allows users to become familiar with different
devices before configuring them in a critical environment.
Simulation of an on-line connection is done by selecting a

manufacturer from the Manufacturer menu, then selecting a
device from the Model menu, just as is done when on-line. After
selecting a software revision, the Online menu for the simulated
device is displayed. Functions are the same as those available
when on-line.
2.5.4.6 Selftest
Selftest performs a test of the Communicator.
2-22 September 2004

2.6 USING THE QUICK ACCESS KEY
Pressing the Quick Access Key (Hot Key) while on-line displays the Quick Access Key menu, a user-
definable menu that provides immediate access to up to 20 frequently performed tasks. The Quick Access
Key menu is accessible when the Communicator is powered and on-line, or when the Communicator is
off, by simply pressing the Quick Access Key. For the Quick Access Key to be active, the Communicator
must be connected properly to a HART-compatible device.
From the factory, the Quick Access Key menu includes (for SITRANS P only):
Zero/Span set – View variables such as percent range, process value, set point, and valve.
Use of this function is described in Section 6.1.3. More options can be added to provide rapid access to
frequently performed tasks. User-defined options can be deleted later, but the factory option is permanent.
To use the Quick Access Key:

1. Connect the Communicator to a powered HART-compatible
device.
2. Press the Quick Access Key (upper right-hand key in the SITRANS P
action keys group). The Communicator will power-up and Hotkey configuration Í]
display the Quick Access Key menu (at right). 1->Zero/span set
Before any custom options have been installed, the Quick

Access Key menu displays only the five factory-installed
options. To add options, see Section 2.6.1.
SAVE
3. Use the UP and DOWN arrows followed by the RIGHT
ARROW/SELECT key to choose an option, or press the
option’s number on the keypad. The menu for the chosen
option displays.
4. Follow the instructions given in Section 6.1.3 to use the
option selected.
5. When finished, press the Quick Access Key to return to the
previous menu.
September 2004 2-23

2.6.1 Adding Quick Access Key Options
The Quick Access Key menu contains space for up to 20 on-line options. For example, if device tags and
damping must be changed often, simply add both of them to the menu. The Communicator automatically
saves them so they can be accessed quickly by pressing the Quick Access Key.
From one of the menus or submenus reached via the Online menu, use the following steps to add
customized options to the Quick Access Key Menu:
1. Using the UP or DOWN arrow keys, move the menu bar to
highlight the option to be added to the Quick Access Key
menu (e.g., Damping, under the Configure Xmtr\Sensor
Input menu).
2. Press any shift key, release it, then press the Quick Access SITRANS P
Key. The Hotkey Configuration menu displays (at right). Hotkey Configuration
ADD: Pres
The Hotkey Configuration menu displays the new topic Zero/span set
being added to the list of current Quick Access Key options.
For example, in the figure at right, Damping is being added.
3. Press ADD (F3) to add the option. Pressing EXIT (F4) ADD|EXIT
terminates the procedure and displays the menu that was
displayed when “Shift,” Quick Access Key was pressed.
4. After pressing ADD (F3), either press ALL (F1) to add the
new option to the Quick Access Key menu for all the
HART-compatible devices supported by the Communicator
or press ONE (F4) to add the option to the Quick Access
Key Menu only for the type of device that is currently
connected.
5. Next, the question “Mark as read-only variable on Quick
Access Key menu?” may appear. Press YES (F1) to mark the
variable for this option as read-only. Press NO (F4) to mark
the variable as read/write. Marking a parameter for a device
as read-only allows users to view, but not change, the
parameter using the Quick Access Key Menu. Marking it as
read/write permits the value to be changed from the Quick
Access Key menu.
SITRANS P
Finally, “Display value of variable on hotkey menu?” is Hotkey Configuration Í]
displayed. Press YES (F1) to display the current variable Zero/span set
associated with the option next to the option on the Quick Pres
Access Key menu as shown at right for Damping and Tag.
Press NO (F2) not to display the variable on the Quick
Access Key menu.
EXIT
6. When finished adding options, press EXIT (F4) to exit the
Hotkey Configuration menu and return to the menu of the
last option deleted.
2-24 September 2004

2.6.2 Deleting Quick Access Key Options
Use the following steps to delete an option from the Quick

Access Key menu:
1. From any on-line menu, press any shift key, release it, then
press the Quick Access Key.
2. The Hotkey Configuration menu displays (at right). SITRANS P
Hotkey Configuration
3. Using the UP or DOWN arrow key, move the menu bar to
ADD: Descriptor
highlight the option to be deleted and press DEL (F2).
Ç
Factory-provided options cannot be deleted. Range Xmtr
4. When finished deleting options, press EXIT (F4) to exit the Damping
Hotkey Configuration menu and return to the menu of the Tag
last option deleted. DEL |ADD |EXIT
September 2004 2-25

2-26 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Pre-Installation Test
3.0 PRE-INSTALLATION TEST

Prior to installation, the transmitter can be tested and operated from the HART Communicator. This test
consists of checking that the transmitter is operational and that all configuration information is correct.
Section 5 Post-Installation Test provides an on-line test procedure. For an in-depth discussion of
transmitter configuration, refer to Section 6 On-Line Configuration and Operation.
Important
Transmitter orientation will affect the analog output zero. Refer to Section 7.1
Calibration for details.
3.1 PROCEDURE
A complete transmitter functional test can be performed and configuration procedures can be practiced.
To operate the transmitter on a test bench, make the connections shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-2 shows
the connections if these tests are to be performed after transmitter installation. A pressure source can also
be connected.
MG00357a
mA
+
+ 250
Vdc _
1
4
+ _
I
O - +
5 4-20 mA
1 Transmitter field terminals Notes:

2 Analog output test terminals 1. Loop current can be shown on the optional transmitter
3 Digital milliammeter display in 0-100%.
4 DC power supply 2. Alternatively, the milliammeter can be connected to the
5 HART Communicator transmitter’s analog output test terminals and the power
supply positive (+) terminal connected to the transmitter’s
positive (+) terminal.
FIGURE 3-1 Bench Test Connections
Note: If using a Model 375 Field Communicator, see the inside of the front cover of this
manual.
September 2004 3-1

Pre-Installation Test UMSITRAPDS3-1
250
_
1
_ 2
+
_
Vdc - +
+ 4-20 mA
4
6
_
mA
+
MG00358b
I
O
1 Transmitter field terminals 5 Controller, recorder, indicator, or other 1-5 Vdc device
2 Analog output terminals 6 DC power supply
3 Digital milliammeter
4 HART Communicator Note: Loop current can also be shown on the optional transmitter
display in 0-100%.
FIGURE 3-2 Field Test Connections
3.1.1 Test Equipment
TEST EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION (see Specifications, Section 9.3)

Power Supply 10.5 to 45 Vdc, see Power Supply Requirements, Section 4.3.5
Multimeter:
Current Range: 4 to 20 mA to measure loop current
Voltage Range: 0-50 Vdc to measure power supply and loop voltage
Current Sense Resistor 250 to 1100Ω to support HART digital communications
Configuration Device Model 275 HART Communicator or Model 375 Field Communicator
Pressure Source Dead Weight Tester or similar device.
Note
Test equipment should be 2 to 10 times more accurate than the transmitter

accuracy.
3-2 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Pre-Installation Test
3.2 ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATION
1. Connect the transmitter, power supply, and HART

Communicator in a loop.
2. Apply power to the transmitter.
3. Press the HART Communicator’s I/O key. The first display SITRANS P
is the Online menu (at right). Appropriate values for pressure Online Í]
and device type should be displayed. 1->Press
2 Type
4. If the Online menu does not appear, or if a “Device not 3 Device Setup
found” message displays, check connections and power
source and repeat the above steps.
HELP |SAVE
3.3 TESTING THE TRANSMITTER
Note: If using a Model 375 Field
Although a transmitter continuously performs an on-line self-
Communicator, see the inside of
test, a more extensive self-test can be performed when
the front cover of this manual.
communication with the HART Communicator has been
established.
1. In the Online menu, choose option 3 Device setup, then
press 2 Diag/Service, and finally press 2 Simulation/Test.
2. In the Simulation/Test menu, choose option 2 Test and then
press1 Self test or press the RIGHT ARROW/SELECT key
to start the test.
3. The transmitter performs the self-test.
− If testing is successful, the message “Self test OK” appears and the Communicator returns to the
Test menu.
− If testing fails, the message “Transmitter FAILED the
transmitter selftest” displays, and the transmitter goes to
the prescribed failsafe condition. Refer to Section 7
Calibration and Maintenance to troubleshoot the
transmitter.
4. Press the HOME softkey to return to the Online menu.
September 2004 3-3

Pre-Installation Test UMSITRAPDS3-1
3.4 REVIEWING CONFIGURATION DATA
Review the configuration before placing a transmitter in service SITRANS P

to ensure that the proper data has been stored. Review
1. Establish communication as described in Section 3.2. Pressure unit
inH2O
2. In the Online menu, press 3 Device Setup, then 5 Review.
3. Press NEXT to review configuration parameters. See the
screen at right. To return to the Device setup menu, press
EXIT. Parameters cannot be changed in the Review mode. HELP |PREV |NEXT |EXIT
Exit the Review mode and enter either Basic Setup or
Detailed Setup to change parameters.
4. If configuration parameters have been changed, save the
configuration. Note the filename and location.
5. To send the configuration to a transmitter:
1) Press the LEFT ARROW/PREVIOUS key until the Main Menu is reached.
2) Press 1 Offline, then press 2 Saved Configuration.
3) Select the location of the configuration and then select the desired configuration from the list of
stored configurations.
4) Press 3 Send to download the configuration to the transmitter. If the configuration is incompatible
with the transmitter, a warning message will appear.
3.5 CHECKING TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
To be sure that the transmitter is reading the proper pressure in

the proper units, use a dead weight tester or other acceptable
pressure standard to apply 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100% of input
values to the transmitter. Check that the corresponding outputs
are 4, 8, 12, 16, and 20 mA.
With the transmitter configured and powered, and with the test
equipment in place, perform the following steps:
1. Connect the HART Communicator and press the I/O Key.
2. In the Online menu, press 3 Device setup, then 1 Process
variables. View applied pressure and transmitter output. SITRANS P: ♥
3. Apply pressure representing 0% of the configured range. Process Variables Í]
Wait at least 5 seconds. 1->Press 0.000 inH2O
2 % rnge 1.00%
4. The current should read 4.00 mA. 3 AO 4.000 mA
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for pressures representing 25, 50, 75, 4 Snsr Temp 24.8°C
and 100% of the configured range. Check for the Ð
corresponding pressure readings and current values. HELP |SAVE |HOME
This completes the pre-installation test of the transmitter. Q
3-4 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Installation
4.0 INSTALLATION
Transmitter installation is discussed in this section. Topics include: equipment delivery and handling,
environmental and installation considerations, and mechanical and electrical installation.
IMPORTANT
Before installing or servicing the transmitter:

• Read the information on the transmitter’s rating and approval plates and ensure that the correct model
is at hand and that the correct procedures in this manual are followed. See Section 9.1 Model
Designations for an explanation of the model designation alphanumeric sequence shown on the rating
plate.
• The installation must conform to the National Electrical Code and all other applicable construction
and electrical codes. Refer to the installation drawings in Appendix B when locating a transmitter in a
hazardous area.
• Refer to Section 9.6 Hazardous Area Classifications for approval agency requirements that affect
installation and use of the instrument and for additional statements concerning installation in a
hazardous environment.
4.1 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY AND HANDLING
Prior to shipment, a transmitter is fully tested and inspected to ensure proper operation. It is then
packaged for shipment. Most accessories are shipped separately. The contents of a box are listed on a
packing slip.
4.1.1 Receipt of Shipment
Each carton should be inspected at the time of delivery for possible external damage. Any visible damage
should be recorded immediately on the carrier’s copy of the delivery slip.
Each carton should be unpacked carefully and its contents checked against the enclosed packing list. At
the same time, each item should be inspected for any hidden damage that may or may not have been
accompanied by exterior carton damage.
If it is found that some items have been damaged or are missing, notify Siemens immediately and provide
full details. In addition, damage must be reported to the carrier with a request for their on-site inspection
of the damaged item and its shipping carton.
4.1.2 Storage
If a transmitter is to be stored for a period prior to installation, review the environmental requirements in
Section 9.3 Specifications.
September 2004 4-1

Installation UMSITRPDS3-1
4.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
Many industrial processes create severe environmental conditions. The conditions at each transmitter
location must be within the specifications stated in Section 9.3 Specifications.
Although the transmitter is designed to perform in harsh conditions, it is prudent to choose a location that
minimizes the effects of heat, vibration, shock, and electrical interference.
CAUTION
Exceeding the specified operating temperature limits can adversely affect

performance and may damage the instrument. See the rating plate and Section 9
Model Designations and Specifications for temperature and other environmental
ratings.
4.3 PRE-INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS AND CALCULATIONS
These sub-sections provide pre-installation considerations and calculations that are needed to ensure
successful mechanical and electrical installations.
4.3.1 Mechanical
• Select the application. Series DSIII transmitters are suitable for, but not limited to:
− Flow measurement
− Gauge pressure measurement
− Level measurement
− Draft pressure measurement
− Absolute pressure measurement
− High differential pressure measurement
− Hydrostatic tank gauging measurement
• Determine the physical mounting of the transmitter. Consider:
− Optional brackets for pipe mounting or surface mounting
− Pipe or tank wall thickness, diameter, rigidity, and freedom from vibration
− Clearance for transmitter installation and maintenance
− Need to rotate the enclosure and display for viewing ease
Refer to Figures 9-1 through 9-4 for transmitter dimensions and to the figures in Sections 4.4 and 4.5
for typical mechanical installations. Refer to Section 9.3 for mechanical and environmental
specifications.
4-2 September 2004

• Determine if an explosion-proof or intrinsically safe installation is required. Refer to the transmitter’s

rating plate for electrical classifications and to Section 4.7 and Section 9. Hazardous area information
for specific approval agencies can be found in Section 9.6 and Appendix B.
An intrinsically safe installation requires user-supplied intrinsic safety barriers that must be installed
in accordance with barrier manufacturer’s instructions for the specific barriers used.
Transmitter certification is based on the “entity” concept in which the user selects barriers that permit
the system to meet the entity parameters.
• Absolute and Differential Models – Consider pressure piping recommendations. Refer to Section
4.3.3.
• Determine conduit routing. Refer to Section 4.5.3.
• Consider bolting a transmitter to a two- or three-valve manifold.
Differential Construction Model – Install a three-valve manifold because this device provides both an
equalizing valve and high and low pressure block valves. Use the equalizing valve to equalize
pressure between inputs before calibrating or servicing the transmitter. Use block valves to isolate the
transmitter from the process for servicing or removal.
Gauge Construction Model – Install a two-valve manifold for similar purposes to those listed above.
Flange Model – Consider using flushing rings to flush and clean the process connection without
removing the flange.
Prepare installation site drawings showing the following:

− Location of the Master Device (e.g., HART Communicator or controller), location and
identification of each transmitter, and location of any signal cable junctions for connecting the
HART Communicator
− Routing plan for signal cable(s) and for power cable(s)
4.3.2 Electrical
• Determine transmitter operating mode (analog or digital) and type of network needed; refer to Section
4.3.4.
• Determine minimum power supply requirements. Refer to Section 4.3.5.
• Select twinaxial cable (shielded twisted pair wire) and determine maximum network cable length.
Refer to Sections 4.3.6 and 9.5.
• Develop the cable route and method of support and protection (e.g. conduit, cable tray). To improve
immunity to interference, keep cable separated from cables with voltage greater than 60V and away
from large electrical equipment.
• Determine the need for network junctions. Refer to Section 4.3.7.
• Intrinsically Safe installations will need barriers. Refer to Section 4.3.8.
• Consider the effect of connecting additional equipment (e.g., recorder, loop powered display) to the
network. Refer to Section 4.3.9.
• Read Section 4.3.10 for shielding and grounding recommendations.
September 2004 4-3

4.3.3 Impulse Piping for Absolute and Differential Models
Impulse piping is the piping to be connected to the transmitter’s process connection(s). For suggested
flow and level measurement piping arrangements, refer to:
• Differential Model - Figures 4-1 and 4-2

• Absolute Model - Figures 4-3 and 4-4
• Flange Model - Figure 4-5
Note the following when planning and installing piping.

• Install impulse piping in accordance with ANSI Code B31.1.0.
• Make impulse piping length as short as possible to reduce frictional loss and temperature-induced
pressure variations. However, when using impulse lines on a high temperature process, locate the
transmitter far enough away from the heat source to keep it within temperature specifications [28°C
(50ºF) per foot cooling to a normal ambient is assumed for uninsulated impulse lines].
• For lines between the process and transmitter, use impulse piping of 3/8" OD or larger to avoid
friction effects (causes lagging) and blockage.
• Use the least number of fittings and valves possible to minimize leakage problems. Teflon® tape is the
recommended thread sealant for process connections at the transmitter.
• Valves used in pressure service should be either globe or gate type. Valves used in gas service should
be of a type that does not permit condensate to build up behind the valve.
• Install sediment chambers with drain valves to collect solids suspended in process liquids or moisture
carried with non-condensing gases.
• Install air chambers with vent valves at high point in piping to vent gas entrained in process liquid.
• Remote diaphragm seals can be used to keep corrosive liquid or gas from the transmitter pressure
inlets and isolation diaphragm.
• Alternatively, use sealing fluid to isolate the process from the transmitter. Sealing fluid must be of
greater density than process fluid and non-miscible.
• For transmitters located above the process, slope piping from the transmitter at least 1 inch/foot (83
mm/M) down toward process. For transmitters below the process, slope piping at least 1 inch/foot (83
mm/M) up to process.
• Protect pressure lines (by shielding if necessary) from objects or equipment that may bend or kink the
line causing fluid flow restriction.
• Protect the pressure lines from extreme temperature ranges. Lines should be protected from freezing
by installing a heat trace.
• A three-valve manifold should be used with a differential transmitter model. A two-valve manifold
can be used with an absolute model to permit servicing and zero checks.
4-4 September 2004

Low
Pressure
Side
Low
Pressure
Flow Side High
Pressure
Side
High
Pressure
Side Model 7MF4433
or 7MF4533
3-Valve
Model 7MF4433 Manifold
Flow
or 7MF4533
3-Valve
Manifold
Horizontal Main Line Flow Horizontal Main Line Flow

Transmitter Below Orifice - Preferred for Liquids and Steam Transmitter Above Orifice - Preferred for Gas Flow
Low
Pressure
Side
High
Low Pressure
Pressure
Side
Side
Flow
Flow
Model 7MF4433
or 7MF4533
High
Pressure Model 7MF4433 3-Valve
Side or 7MF4533 Manifold
3-Valve
Manifold
MG00344a
Vertical Main Line Flow Vertical Main Line Flow

Transmitter Below Orifice Transmitter Above Orifice
FIGURE 4-1 Differential Flow Measurement Piping for Gas and Liquid
September 2004 4-5

Fill Connection
LP Shut-Off LP Shut-Off
Valve Valve
HP Shut-Off Elevated-Zero, See

Max. Range Valve Max. Range Distance Y, Section 9
Note 5 Specifi-
Span Span cations
for range
Min. Range LP line Min. Range limit.
empty -
not filled
with con-
densate. LP line
Suppressed-Zero: To HP Shut-Off
filled with
calculate maximum Note 3 Valve Note 3
condensate
distance, subtract Note 1
actual span setting Distance X
from range limit given See Note 4
in specification.
HP LP HP LP
Dripleg and Drain Valve
A. Pressurized (Closed) Vessel Installation: B. Pressurized (Closed) Vessel Installation:

Non-Condensable Fluid Condensable Fluid
MG00346b
Notes:
1. Transmitter may be mounted at or below the

HP Shut-Off minimum level to be measured.
Max. Range Valve
2. Open or vented vessels require only a high pressure
(HP) connection.
Span
Vent 3. High pressure line senses static pressure plus level.
Min. Range
Low pressure line senses pressure only. The two
pressures oppose each other, canceling the effect
of static pressure.
Suppressed-Zero: To 4. Distance "X" can be any distance since both high

calculate maximum and low pressure lines have equal and opposite
distance, subtract forces which cancel the forces created by this
actual span setting distance.
from range limit given
in specification. 5. Entire length of low pressure pipe is kept full of
Vent condensate to act as a reference.
HP LP 6. See Appendix C for information on calculating

suppressed and elevated zero ranges.
C. Open Vessel Installation
FIGURE 4-2 Differential Liquid Measurement Piping
4-6 September 2004

* Gauge Construction, Shown Model 7MF4033*, For gases,

** Differential Construction 7MF4233*, mounting
or 7MF4333** above the line
Safety is preferred.
Shut-Off
Valve
(Gas) Shut-Off
Valve Air Chamber
with Vent Valve.
Model 7MF4033*, Install at high
7MF4233*, Union point to collect
or 7MF4333** air entrained
Safety Shut-Off in liquids.
Valve (Steam or OR
OR Safety
Liquid)
Shut-Off
Shut-Off Valve
Valve (Gas)
For liquids and
steam, mounting
Union
MG00345a
below the line
is preferred.
Safety Shut-Off
Suppressed-Zero Range Valve (Liquid)
Non-Corrosive Dry Gases and Liquids Elevated Zero-Range
Non-Corrosive Dry Gases and Liquids
Model 7MF4033*, * Gauge Construction, Shown

7MF4233*, Safety ** Differential Construction
or 7MF4333** Shut-Off
Valve
Sediment Chamber (Gas)
and Drain Valve.
Used to collect solids
in liquid suspension
or moisture carried
Shut-Off with non-condensing
Valve gas.
Union
Safety Shut-Off
Valve (Liquid) Model 7MF4033*,
OR 7MF4233*,
or 7MF4333**
Safety Dripleg with Drain Valve,
Shut-Off OR Used to collect solids in
Valve liquid suspension or
(Gas) moisture carried with
non-condensing gases.
Safety Shut-Off Union

Shut-Off
Valve (Liquid) Valve
Elevated Zero-Range Wet Gases (Non-Condensing) Suppressed Zero-Range Wet Gases (Non-Condensing)
and Liquids with Solids in Suspension and Liquids with Solids in Suspension
FIGURE 4-3 Absolute or Gauge Pressure Measurement Piping
September 2004 4-7

Filling Tee with

Safety Hex Plug
Shut-Off
Valve Model 7MF4033 or 7MF4233, Gauge
Construction, or Model 7MF4333,
Differential Construction
Shut-Off
Valve
MG00347a
Drain
Valve
To Drain
FIGURE 4-4 Steam Service, Below the Line Mounting
4-8 September 2004

Dry Line Leg Non-Condensing

Atmosphere
Flange on High Max. Level
Max. Level Pressure Side Span
Span H1
H1
Low Pressure
Min. Level
Side Vented to
Min. Level Atmosphere
Blowdown
Valve
Open Tank, Level Measurement Closed Tank, Non-Condensing Atmosphere, Level Measurement
MG00348b
Notes:
Filled Blowdown
Reference Valve 1. Transmitter may be mounted at or below the
Line minimum level to be measured.
Condensing 2. Open or vented vessels require only a high pressure

Atmosphere (HP) connection.
Max. Level
Span 3. High pressure line senses static pressure plus level.
H2 Low pressure line senses pressure only. The two
H1
pressures oppose each other, canceling the effect
Min. Level of static pressure.
4. Distance "X" can be any distance since both high

and low pressure lines have equal and opposite
Flange on High Plugged forces which cancel the forces created by this
Pressure Side Filling "T" distance.
Low Pressure
Side
5. Entire length of low pressure pipe is kept full of
condensate to act as a reference.
Closed Tank, Condensing Atmosphere, Level Measurement
6. See Appendix C for information on calculating
suppressed and elevated zero ranges.
FIGURE 4-5 Open and Closed Tank Level Measurement, Flange Mounted Transmitters
September 2004 4-9

4.3.4 Transmitter Operating Mode and Network Type
A transmitter outputs either an analog current or an equivalent digital signal, depending upon the selected
operating mode. The operating mode also determines the type of network (Point-to-Point or Multi-Drop)
to be installed, as shown in Table 4-1 and the following subsections.
TABLE 4-1 Operating Mode and Network
OPERATING MODE NETWORK TYPE NETWORK FIGURE(S)

Analog Point-to-Point 4-6, 4-7, and 4-8
Digital Multi-Drop 4-9
Note: If using a Model 375 Field Communicator, see the inside of the front
cover of this manual.
4.3.4.1 Analog Mode
When a transmitter is configured for analog mode operation, the following statements apply.
• The transmitter outputs a 4-20 mA signal for input to devices such as controllers and recorders.
• A Point-to-Point network is used comprising a transmitter, Primary/Secondary Master, and other non-
signaling devices. The transmitter polling address is 0 (zero).
Point-to-Point networks are shown in Figures 4-6, 4-7, and 4-8.

• The optional display can be used for local indication of transmitter output.
• Each transmitter is factory configured for analog mode unless otherwise ordered. The polling address
is set to zero (0).
• A Model 275 HART Communicator is used for configuration, diagnostics, and reporting the current
process variable.
4-10 September 2004

Transmitter
Network Terminals
250 See Note 6 See Note 5
See Note 2 Junction
Controller, +
Recorder,
Indicator, or
other 1-5 Vdc _
+
Device
_
See Note 1
- +
4-20 mA
_
System Power See Note 3
Supply +
I
O
Network for Non-Hazardous Locations
MG00349a
Non-Hazardous Hazardous
Location Location
250 See Note 6
See Note 2
Controller, +
Recorder,
Indicator, or
other 1-5 Vdc
I
Device _
O
_ +
See Note 1
System Power + See Note 4 - +

4-20 mA
Supply _
Transmitter
Terminals
See Note 3 See Note 5
Network for Hazardous Locations
1. The system power supply is shown separate from the host input device. In practice, it may be part of
the host input device. This device can be a HART or non-HART signaling device, a Primary Master,
or a Secondary Master.
2. Network resistance equals the sum of the barrier resistances and the current sense resistor.
Minimum value is 250 Ohms; maximum value is 1100 Ohms.
3. Connect the HART Communicator as shown in Figure 2-2 for hazardous and non-hazardous
locations. The HART Communicator is a non-polar device.
4. Supply and return barriers are shown. Interconnect all cable shields and ground only at the barriers.
5. For access to transmitter field terminals, remove the enclosure cap.
6. Maximum loop cable length is as calculated using the formula in Section 4.3.6.
FIGURE 4-6 Point-To-Point Network (Analog Mode)
September 2004 4-11

Location Location
250 See Note 6
See Note 1
34
Procidia
I
Terminals
AIN1
O
35
See Note 4 + _
33
18 See Note 3
- +
GND 4-20 mA
MG00350a
See Note 2 Transmitter

Terminals
Common Ground Bus See Note 5
1. Minimum network resistance equals the sum of the barrier resistances and the current sense resistor.
4. Procidia terminal assignments are:
− 34 – Analog Input 1 +
− 35 – Analog Input 1 Common
− 33 – 24 Vdc
− 18 – Station Common
6. Maximum cable length is as calculated using the formula in Section 4.3.6.
FIGURE 4-7 Procidia to Transmitter Connections (Analog Mode)
4-12 September 2004

Location Location
250 See Note 6
See Note 1
20
Model 353/354
I
Terminals
AIN1
O
21 _
See Note 4 +
5
6 See Note 3
- +
4-20 mA
GND
Transmitter
MG00350a
See Note 2 Terminals

See Note 5
Common Ground Bus
1. Minimum network resistance equals the sum of the barrier resistances and the current sense resistor.
4. Controller terminal assignments are:
− 20 – Analog Input 1 +
− 21 – Analog Input 1 Common
− 5 – +24 Vdc
− 6 – Station Common
6. Maximum cable length is as calculated using the formula in Section 4.3.6.
FIGURE 4-8 Model 353/354 to Transmitter Connections (Analog Mode)
September 2004 4-13

4.3.4.2 Digital Mode
When a transmitter is configured for digital mode operation, the following statements apply.
• Process and configuration data are transmitted digitally. The analog output of each transmitter is
“parked” at 4 mA.
• Employs a Multi-Drop network. See Figure 4-9.
• The optional display can be used for local indication of transmitter output.
The number of allowable network elements is:

– Primary and Secondary Masters - 1 each
– Transmitters - 1 to 15
• The HART communication source can be a Primary or Secondary Master. A Primary Master can be
used for data acquisition, maintenance, or control purposes. A Secondary Master, the HART
Communicator, for example, may be used for configuration, diagnostics, and reporting current
process variable.
• Place the transmitter in the digital mode by assigning it a polling address (1 to 15) with the HART
Communicator (see Section 6).
• Each transmitter connected to a network must have a unique address.
4.3.5 Power Supply Requirements
A power supply1 is needed to power the transmitter(s). The power supply can be:
• A separate stand-alone supply capable of powering several transmitters. It can be mounted in a
control room or in the field. Follow the power supply manufacturer’s recommendations with regard to
mounting and environmental considerations.
• Located in a controller (such as a Primary Master) or other station able to safely provide additional
operating current and meet the power supply specifications of Section 9.3.
Determine needed power supply output voltage by 1100

calculating the Network Resistance and consulting the
Network Resistance, Ohms
adjacent figure. It shows the minimum power supply voltage

750
needed for the calculated Network Resistance.
X03047S1
The total Network Resistance is the sum of the Current Sense 500
Resistance, end-to-end Barrier Resistance (if used), wire
resistance, and any other resistances in the loop. The
250 Operating
minimum Network Resistance (see Section 10 Glossary) Region
required to support HART communications is 250Ω. The
maximum resistance is 1100Ω. Refer to Section 4.3.5.1 or 0
4.3.5.2 for calculations.
10.5 15 30 45
Power Supply, Vdc
1
An SELV (Separated Extra-Low Voltage) power supply is suggested; see IEC 364-1 and IEC 536.
4-14 September 2004

See Note 4
MG00351a
Location Location
250
See Note 2
+
Network
Primary
Master
See Note 1
_
I
O
System + See Note 5

Power Supply _
+ _ + _ + _
- + - + - +
4-20 mA 4-20 mA 4-20 mA
Transmitter 1 Transmitter 2 Transmitter 15

See Notes 3 & 6 See Notes 3 & 6 See Notes 3 & 6
1. The system power supply is shown separate from the host input device. In practice, it may be part of
the host input device. The host input device can be a HART or non-HART signaling device, a Primary
Master or a Secondary Master.
2. Network resistance equals the sum of the barrier resistances and the current sense resistor.
3. A maximum of 15 transmitters may be connected. All must be configured for digital mode.
4. Connect the HART Communicator as shown in Figure 2-2 for hazardous or non-hazardous locations.
The HART Communicator is a non-polar device.
FIGURE 4-9 Multi-Drop Network (Digital Mode)
September 2004 4-15

4.3.5.1 Point-to-Point Network
The graph in Section 4.3.5 defines an analog mode transmitter’s operating region for the allowable ranges
of supply voltage and network resistance. Perform the following calculations to ensure that the power
supply output voltage permits the transmitter to remain within the indicated operating range.
1. Calculate the minimum power supply output voltage.
The minimum network power supply voltage requirement is a function of Network Resistance and
full scale current (20 mA), and is calculated by the following formula:
Minimum Power Supply Output Voltage = 10.5 volts + (0.02 × Network Resistance in ohms)
Power supply output voltage must be greater than the calculated value. The minimum voltage across
the input terminals of a transmitter is 10.5 volts.
2. Calculate the maximum power supply output voltage.
The maximum network power supply voltage is a function of Network Resistance and zero scale
current (4 mA), and is calculated by the following formula:
Maximum Power Supply Output Voltage = Vmax + (0.004 × Network Resistance in ohms)
Power supply output voltage must be less than the calculated value. The maximum voltage (Vmax)
permitted across the input terminals is:
− Non-intrinsically safe transmitter: 45 volts
− Intrinsically safe transmitter: 30 volts
4.3.5.2 Multi-Drop Network
Perform the following simple calculations to ensure that the power supply output voltage permits the
Transmitter to remain within its operating range.
1. Calculate the minimum power supply output voltage.
Minimum network power supply voltage is a function of Network Resistance and the total current
draw of all transmitters in the network, and is calculated by the following formula:
Minimum Supply Output Voltage = 10.5 volts + [(0.004 × number of transmitters on Network) × (Network Resistance)]
Power supply output voltage must be greater than the calculated value. The minimum voltage across
the input terminals of a transmitter is 10 volts.
2. Calculate the maximum power supply output voltage.
Maximum network power supply voltage is a function of Network Resistance and total current draw
of all the transmitters in the network, and is calculated by the following formula:
Maximum Supply Output Voltage = Vmax + [(0.004 × number of transmitters on Network) x (Network Resistance)]
Power supply output voltage must be less than the calculated value. The maximum voltage (Vmax)
permitted across the input terminals of a transmitter is:
− Non-intrinsically safe transmitter: 45 volts
− Intrinsically safe transmitter: 30 volts
4-16 September 2004

The maximum number of transmitters that can be connected to a Multi-Drop Network is 15. Each
transmitter is “parked” in a low current draw mode (4 mA) to conserve power. Ensure that the network
power supply is capable of sourcing the total current consumed by the number of transmitters on the
network.
4.3.6 Determining Network (Loop) Length
A cable length calculation is necessary when HART communication is to be employed. Cable capacitance
directly affects maximum network length.
4.3.6.1 Cable Capacitance
Cable type, conductor size, and recommended cable model numbers are stated in Section 9.5.1 Two-Wire
Cable.
Cable capacitance is a parameter used in the calculation of the maximum length of cable that can be used
to construct the network. The lower the cable capacitance the longer the network can be. Manufacturers
typically list two capacitance values for an instrumentation cable:
1. Capacitance between the two conductors.
2. Capacitance between one conductor and the other conductor(s) connected to shield. This capacitance
is the worst case value and is to be used in the cable length formula.
4.3.6.2 Maximum Cable Length Calculation
The maximum permissible single-pair cable length is 10,000 feet (3000 meters) or less as determined by
the following formula:
L = (65,000,000 / R x C) – (Cf + 10,000 / C)
Formula Definitions:
L: The maximum total length of cable permitted to construct the network. L = feet when C is in pF/ft;
L = meters when C is in pF/meter.
R: The Network Resistance which is the ohmic sum of the current sense resistance and barrier
resistance (both return and supply), if any, in the network and the resistance of the wire.
C: Cable capacitance per unit length between one conductor and the other conductor connected to the
shield. C may be in pF/ft or pF/meter.
Cf: Total input terminal capacitance of field instruments; the Primary Master is excluded. Cf is given
by the following formula:
Cf = (sum of all Cn values) x (5000)
Where Cn is an integer (e.g., 1, 2, 3) corresponding to the input terminal capacitance of a Field

Instrument. Cn values are determined as follows:
September 2004 4-17

FIELD INSTRUMENT CAPACITANCE Cn VALUE
Less than 5000 pF 1

5000 pF to less than 10000 pF 2
For field instruments without Cn values, use Cn = 1
WARNING
For an intrinsically safe installation, refer to the Control Drawing(s) in Appendix B

for entity parameters, which include Ci transmitter input capacitance, and other
installation data.
Example Calculation:
Assume a network consists of two field instruments (both Cn = 1).
Let R = 250Ω, C = 40 pF/ft, Cf = (1 + 1) x 5000 = 10,000
Then L = (65,000,000 / (250 x 40)) – ((10,000 + 10,000) / 40) = 6000 feet (1800 meters)
4.3.7 Network Junctions
A network junction is shown in Figure 4-6. It is a wiring junction installed at a convenient point in the
loop to facilitate wiring, testing, and troubleshooting. Typically the junction is a conventional terminal
block mounted on a panel with a protective cover, cabinet, or junction box to enclose and protect wiring
terminals.
Multiple junctions can be installed to provide field access terminals for the connection of a HART
Communicator. Note the following:
• Network with barriers – Locate a junction anywhere along the network in the non-hazardous area.
• Network without barriers – A junction may be located anywhere along the network between the
power supply and transmitter.
• A junction should be a simple electrical series connection containing NO repeaters or other devices
(active or passive) that can degrade HART communications.
4-18 September 2004

4.3.8 Safety Barriers
Installed safety barriers must comply with the following:

• Locate intrinsic safety barriers between the system power supply (e.g., Primary Master, if used)
residing in the non-hazardous area and the transmitter(s) in the hazardous area.
• Combined or separate supply and return barriers may be used.
• For an intrinsically safe application, the DC voltage applied to the safe side of the barrier must be 0.6
Vdc less than the rated barrier working voltage.
• An active supply barrier must be operated within its specified input working voltage.
• Barrier shunt impedance to ground to the HART range of frequencies (500 Hz to 2500 Hz) shall not
be less than 5000Ω.
• Barrier end-to-end resistance, stated by the manufacturer, is used in calculating the maximum
Network cable length and minimum and maximum network voltages.
• The barrier shall be installed and wired in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
4.3.9 Connection of Miscellaneous Hardware
Miscellaneous non-signaling hardware (e.g., recorders, current meters) may be connected to a Point-to-
Point network in accordance with the following list.
Important
No non-signaling hardware (meters or measuring devices) may be connected to a

Multi-Drop network since the transmitters, in this mode, do not output an analog
process variable.
• Miscellaneous hardware may be series or parallel connected to the network according to its function.
• Miscellaneous hardware must be passive two-terminal devices.
• Miscellaneous hardware may not generate any type of noise or signals, other than noise that is
inherent in resistive components.
• Individual miscellaneous hardware must meet the following requirements:
– Capacitance to ground..........................50 pF maximum
– Resistance to ground ............................1 MΩ minimum
– Impedance if series connected ................Less than 10Ω
– Impedance if parallel connected ......Greater than 50kΩ
September 2004 4-19

The maximum number of miscellaneous devices per network is 16. The combined electrical
characteristics may not exceed the following:
– Maximum capacitance to ground........................800 pF
– Minimum resistance to ground ..........................62.5kΩ
– Maximum series impedance..................................160Ω
– Minimum parallel impedance .............................3125Ω
4.3.10 Shielding and Grounding
GROUNDING
Ground the transmitter’s enclosure through a 16 AWG (1.3 mm2) or larger copper wire to a low resistance
ground, such as a nearby metal cold water pipe. A grounding screw for this purpose is provided on the
outside of the enclosure beneath the field terminals cap (Figure 1-7). The ground wire should be installed
even though the enclosure is often grounded through the electrical conduit or, in some transmitter models,
through the process connections and piping.
SHIELDING
Shielded loop cable is recommended. The preferred method of grounding that shield is shown in Figures
4-6 through 4-9.
Ground the cable shield at one point. Multiple grounds can cause signal error and poor HART
performance. The location of the ground connection is often determined by the installation environment
(hazardous or non-hazardous) or by the requirements of a regulating agency.
The following grounding practices are field proven and will reduce magnetically coupled interference.
Select the appropriate option from the three bulleted items below for the installation at hand.
• Hazardous location - ground the shield(s) only at the barrier(s) or as recommended on the appropriate
control (installation) drawing and by the certifying agency.
• Non-hazardous location - ground the shield at the network power supply.
− Ground the cable shield to the power supply ground terminal. Do not connect the cable shield at
the transmitter.
− If a network junction box is used, splice the input and output cable shields and isolate them from
ground.
• Non-hazardous location - ground the shield at the Transmitter
− Ground the cable shield at the ground screw inside the transmitter’s signal terminal compartment.
− Power supply (+) and (-) connections must be floated.
− If a network junction box is used, splice input and output shields and isolate them from ground.
4-20 September 2004

4.4 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
This section describes the mechanical installation of a transmitter and the installation of electrical conduit
for wiring. Transmitter dimensions are given in Figures 9-1 through 9-4. Related mounting information
for optional mounting bracket kits is provided in Figures 4-10, 4-11, and 4-12. Table 1-1 correlates
measurement, model number, measuring cell, and figure number.
Mount a transmitter in any position (orientation). The mounting position can cause a zero shift, however,
any zero shift is simply calibrated out with the transmitter installed in its final mounting position. Refer to
Section 7 Calibration and Maintenance for details.
The transmitter enclosure can be rotated relative to the measuring cell to clear an obstruction or to allow
viewing the optional display. The display can then be rotated in 90° increments for ease of reading. Refer
to Section 4.5 for details.
Be sure to allow sufficient clearance for:

• Connection to impulse piping and installation of conduit
• Removal of the enclosure end caps
• Wiring, cleaning, and servicing of the transmitter
• Viewing of the optional display
• Access to the configuration pushbuttons
4.4.1 Pipe Mounting, Differential and Gauge Construction
A differential or absolute transmitter can be mounted to a vertical or horizontal 2-inch pipe using an
optional mounting bracket kit; kit part numbers are given in Section 9.2 Accessories.
1. Refer to the appropriate figure and determine orientation of bracket and transmitter on selected pipe.
− See Figure 4-10 for Absolute Pressure Models 7MF4033 and 7MF4233, gauge construction.
− See Figure 4-11 for Absolute Pressure Model 7MF4333, differential construction.
− See Figure 4-11 or 4-12 for Differential Pressure Models 7MF4433 and 7MF4533.
2. As shown in the appropriate figure, fasten the transmitter to the mounting bracket with the supplied
hardware.
3. Fasten the mounting bracket to the pipe using the supplied hardware.
1) At the selected location on the pipe and in the desired orientation, place the pipe groove side of
the mounting bracket against the desired part of the pipe surface.
2) Slip the U-bolt around the pipe and through one of the two pairs of mounting holes in the bracket.
4. Place a supplied washer and hex nut on each end of the U-bolt and hand tighten the nuts. Rotate the
bracket around the pipe to place the transmitter in the desired position and secure the bracket to the
pipe. Tighten mounting hardware:
• Models 7MF4033 and 7MF4233 - 275 in/lbs (31.1 Nm)
• Models 7MF4333, 7MF4433, and 7MF4533 - 400 in/lbs (45.2 Nm)
5. Rotate the enclosure or reposition the optional display as necessary. Refer to Section 4.5.
September 2004 4-21

Models 7MF4033 and 7MF4233

920-07010-XXX-1.pcx
FIGURE 4-10 Pipe Mounting, Gauge Construction
High
Pressure
Side
MG00402a
Low
Pressure
Side
Models 7MF4033, 7MF4433, and 7MF4533 Labels, Low and High Pressure Sides
920-07011-XXX-1.pdf
FIGURE 4-11 Pipe Mounting, Differential Construction
4-22 September 2004

Models 7MF4333, 7MF4433, and 7MF4533

920-07012-XXX-1.pdf
FIGURE 4-12 Differential Construction, Position Options
4.4.2 Direct Mounting to Process, Model 7MF4433 or 7MF4533
A differential transmitter can be interfaced to the process through a Low

Nipple Mount for
two- or three-valve manifold and supported by the piping Liquid Service Pressure
connections (3-inch nipples) if mounted directly at the point of Side
Orifice
measurement. Flanges
Transmitter process connections are on 2.13-inch (54 mm) centers Flow

to allow direct mounting (bolting) to a manifold with the same
spacing. Each transmitter process connection (end cap) has two
tapped 7/16-20 mounting holes and a 1/4 NPT tapped pressure
inlet. High pressure (+) and low pressure (-) sides of the transmitter High
MG00352b
are marked by labels (see Figure 4-11) and engraved on the capsule Pressure
between the end caps. Side 3-Valve
End Cap
Manifold
Process orifice flanges with standard 2.13-inch spacing permit a transmitter and two- or three-valve
manifold combination to be direct mounted.
The procedure for mounting a transmitter to a two- or three-valve manifold, and the manifold to the
orifice flanges, is covered by the installation instructions supplied by the manifold manufacturer.
The following is a guide and may need to be modified for some installations. Teflon® tape is the
recommended thread sealant for process connections at the transmitter.
1. If installed, remove process connection blocks from the transmitter’s end caps (process manifold).
2. Press the supplied O-ring seals into the grooves in the face of the two- or three-valve manifold and
bolt the transmitter end caps to the transmitter side of the two- or three-valve manifold. Tighten
mounting bolts to 400 in/lbs (45.2 Nm).
September 2004 4-23

3. Thread ½" nipples, 3 inches (or less) in length, into the high- and low-pressure ports of the orifice
flanges. Thread sealant must be used.
4. Thread the process connection blocks directly onto the nipples. Thread sealant must be used. The 1/2
NPT tapped hole in a process connection block is off center to accommodate 2-inch or 2.25-inch
centers. For 2.13" pipe centers, the tapped holes should be offset to the right side.
5. Place the supplied Teflon gaskets on the connection blocks and bolt them to the manifold. Tighten the
mounting bolts according to the manifold manufacturer’s recommendations.
4.4.3 Flange Mounting, Model 7MF4633/7MF4912
A liquid level transmitter can be flange mounted directly to the point of measurement on a vessel. The
flange-mounted diaphragm is factory assembled to the high-pressure side of the transmitter measuring
cell.
Figure 9-4 shows a typical flanged level transmitter. Table 4-2 includes the following mounting
information:
• Flange thickness
• Flange diameter and pressure rating
• Number of flange mounting holes
• Flange mounting hole diameter
• Flange bolt circle diameter
Refer to Figure 9-4 and Table 4-2 when performing the following procedure:
1. Determine needed bolt length. The user must supply mounting bolts, nuts, and washers. Bolt length is
determined by the combined thickness of the flange mounted on the vessel and the transmitter’s
flange.
2. As necessary, loosen the enclosure rotation set screw and rotate the enclosure for clearance and best
viewing of the optional display.
3. Bolt the transmitter’s flange to the vessel’s flange. Four mounting positions (90° increments) are
possible with 2-inch flanges and eight positions (45° increments) are possible with 4-inch flanges.
4-24 September 2004

TABLE 4-2 Flange And Extension Dimensions
A. Flange Dimensions
SIZE DIM DIM DIM DIM DIM BOLT NO. OF FLANGE
“D” “BC” “T” “ED” “RF” DIA BOLTS PER
2" – 150# 6.00 4.75 0.75 1.95 5/8 4
(152.40) (120.65) (19.05) (49.53)
2" – 300# 6.50 5.00 0.88 1.95 5/8 8
(165.10) (127.00) (22.23) (49.53)
3" – 150# 7.50 6.00 0.94 2.81 0.06 5/8 4
(190.50) (152.40) (23.81) (71.37) (1.58)
3" – 300# 8.25 6.625 1.13 2.81 3/4 8 ANSI
(209.55) (168.28) (28.58) (71.37) B16.5
4" – 150# 9.00 7.50 0.94 3.70 5/8 8
(228.60) (190.50) (23.81) (93.98)
4" – 300# 10.00 7.875 1.25 3.70 3/4 8
(254.00) (200.03) (31.75) (93.98)
50MM – 6.50 4.92 0.71 M16 4
10/16 BAR (165.00) (125.00) (18.00)
50MM – 6.50 4.92 0.79 M16 4
25/40 BAR (165.00) (125.00) (20.00)
80MM – 7.87 6.30 0.79 Consult 0.12 M16 8 DIN
10/16 BAR (200.00) (160.00) (20.00) Factory (3.00) 2526
80MM – 7.87 6.30 0.94 M16 8 TYPE
25/40 BAR (200.00) (160.00) (24.00) C
100MM – 8.66 7.09 0.79 M16 8
10/16 BAR (220.00) (180.00) (20.00)
100MM – 9.25 7.48 0.94 M20 8
25/40 BAR (235.00) (190.00) (24.00)
B. Extension Length
DIM 0 2.00 4.00 6.00
“L” (0.00) (50.80) (101.60) (152.40)
Notes:
1. Dimensions are in inches (millimeters).
2. End cap can be rotated 180º for top or bottom vent/drain, side vent option only.
September 2004 4-25

4.5 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION, ALL MODELS
The following subsections describe rotating the enclosure housing relative to the measuring cell to clear
obstructions or view the optional display, orienting the display for ease of reading, and installing
electrical conduit and cables.
4.5.1 Enclosure Rotation
1. Loosen the enclosure setscrew using a 3/32" (3 mm) Allen wrench. See Figure 4-13. The enclosure
can be rotated approximately 135º in either direction from the point where the enclosure rotation
arrow points directly at the enclosure setscrew. See Figure 4-13.
Important
If the high end of the ramp-shaped recess in the enclosure neck is rotated past the
enclosure rotation arrow on the measuring cell, damage to internal electrical
connections can occur requiring replacement of the measuring cell.
After positioning the enclosure, tighten the enclosure setscrew to between 30.1 in-lbs and 31.9 in-lbs
(3.4 N-m and 3.6 N-m).
2. Position the display as necessary. Refer to Section 4.5.2.
2
MG00353a
Differential Construction Gauge Construction
1 Enclosure rotation arrow (enclosure rotation reference point)

2 Ramp-shaped recessed area indicating enclosure rotation range; maximum rotation of the
enclosure is approximately 135º either direction from the point where the enclosure rotation
arrow points directly at the enclosure setscrew.
3 Enclosure setscrew (use a 3/32" (3 mm) Allen wrench)
4 Tag plate on transmitter enclosure
FIGURE 4-13 Enclosure Rotation Considerations
4-26 September 2004

4.5.2 Display Orientation
As supplied the display is oriented for viewing with the transmitter installed vertically, as shown below
and by most of the illustrations in this manual. When the transmitter is installed in another orientation,
perform the following steps to reorient the display for ease of reading.
1. Turn off power to the transmitter.
2. Remove the enclosure cap that has the sightglass by rotating the cap counterclockwise.
3. Fasten an anti-static wrist strap on your wrist and ground it to the transmitter ground
screw.
4. Use a Phillips blade screwdriver to remove the two screws holding the display. The display
is electrically connected to the transmitter electronics by the display cable. Refer to Figure 4-14.
5. Hold the display just in front of the transmitter enclosure and rotate it in quarter turns to find the
viewing position where reading is easiest. Four positions, 90° apart, are provided. Do not rotate the
display more than 180° in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
6. Align the two holes in the display circuit board with the hex standoffs in the enclosure and install the
two screws removed above.
7. Install the enclosure cap and remove the anti-static wrist strap.
2
MG00353a
1. Display Mounting Screw

2. Display Assembly
3. Enclosure Setscrew
Note: Shown with enclosure cap removed.
FIGURE 4-14 Display Removal and Repositioning
September 2004 4-27

4.5.3 Electrical Conduit and Cable Installation
All electrical conduit and all signal wires must be supplied by the user. Access to electrical terminals is
described in Section 4.5.2.3.
For conduit and cable routing, refer to user’s installation drawings. Installation of conduit and cabling
should follow the guidelines given below.
4.5.3.1 Conduit
• Transmitter conduit inlets accept male conduit fittings. Refer to the transmitter’s rating plate and
Section 9.1 to determine whether conduit threads are 1/2-14 NPT or M20 x 1.5.
Seal NPT fittings with Teflon tape; seal M20 fittings with a soft-setting sealing compound rated for at
least 105°C (221°F).
• When routing conduit, avoid areas that might subject the conduit to chemical or physical abuse or
areas with high electromagnetic interference/radio frequency interference (EMI/RFI) conditions.
• Install conduit for field wiring.
• If a high humidity environment can exist and the transmitter is located at a low point in the conduit
run, install drain seals at the transmitter’s conduit inlets to prevent condensation from entering the
transmitter. See Figure 4-15.
• Remove all sharp edges or burrs from conduit that may damage wires. 18 inches of flex conduit is
recommended at each transmitter.
4
2 3
3
MG00354a
+ + + +
4
1
+ + + +
Conduit Drain Explosion Proof
1 Drain seal in conduit coupling 3 Plug unused electrical entrance

2 Install conduit seal: Crouse-Hinds Type EYS or equivalent 4. Electrical conduit
FIGURE 4-15 Conduit Drain and Explosion Proof Installations
4-28 September 2004

4.5.3.2 Cables
• Mark or tag each cable conductor as either LOOP (+) or LOOP (-) to ensure correct connection at the
transmitter.
• Use pulling grips and cable lubricants for easier cable pulling. Pull cable through conduit into
transmitter terminal compartment.
• Do not exceed the maximum permitted pulling tension on the cables. Maximum tension is normally
specified as 40% of the cable’s breaking strength.
• Do not exceed the maximum conduit fill specified by the National Electric Code.
4.5.3.3 Access to Transmitter Terminal Compartment
1. Remove the enclosure cap closest to the electrical entrance by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Install the enclosure cap by turning it clockwise until the O-ring contact the enclosure. Tighten the
cap one additional turn to compress the O-ring.
September 2004 4-29

4.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
This section describes loop wiring for Point-to-Point and Multi-Drop networks. Refer also to Section 4.8
for installation in hazardous locations. Figure 4-16 shows typical conductor terminations.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage can cause death or serious injury.
Remove power from all wires and terminals before

working on this equipment.
CAUTION
Use supply wires suitable for 5°C (10°F) above ambient temperature.
Before wiring the loop, the following should already have been completed:
• Selection of either analog or digital operating mode and corresponding Point-to-Point or Multi-Drop
network; Section 4.3.4.
• Selection of a power supply; Section 4.3.5.
• Mechanical installation of transmitter(s) installed; Section 4.4.
• Pulling of loop cable through conduit and into terminal compartment; Section 4.5.3.
To connect the transmitter to the loop, perform the following steps.

1. Remove power from all involved wires and terminals.
2. Access the transmitter signal terminals by removing the enclosure cap nearest to the electrical
entrance. Turn the cap counterclockwise.
3. Determine method of connection to transmitter signal terminals; see Figure 4-16 for typical
connection methods.
4. Strip loop cable and conductors. Install ring tongue or spring spade terminals for #8 screws and the
cable conductor gauge. If terminals will not be used, tin conductor ends and form a loop.
5. Connect the loop cable to the LOOP (+) and (-) terminals inside the transmitter’s enclosure. Refer to
Figures 4-6 through 4-9 for the needed connections for the type of network. Terminals will
accommodate wire sizes up to 16 AWG (1.3 mm2).
6. Install the enclosure cap by turning it clockwise until the O-ring contacts the enclosure, Tighten the
cap one additional turn to compress the O-ring.
7. If one of the two electrical conduit entrances in the housing is not used, it should be plugged. Refer to
the transmitter’s rating plate and Section 9 to determine whether entrance holes accept 1/2-NPT or
M20 x 1.5 fittings.
Seal 1/2-NPT fitting with Teflon tape; seal M20 fitting with a soft setting sealing compound rated for
at least 105ºC (221ºF).
4-30 September 2004

8. Ground the enclosure by installing a 16 AWG (1.3 mm2) or larger copper wire between the enclosure
ground screw and a low resistance ground, such as a nearby metal cold water pipe.
3
2
MG00355a
4
1. Solid conductor with loop formed in end of lead

2. Stranded conductor with spring spade terminal
3. Stranded conductor with ring tongue terminal
4. One of three terminals in the electrical enclosure. Remove end cap to access terminals.
5. Terminal screw
6. Pressure plate
FIGURE 4-16 Network Conductor Terminations
September 2004 4-31

4.7 HAZARDOUS AREA INSTALLATION
Drawings providing transmitter installation data for hazardous areas are located in Appendix B Hazardous
Area Installation. Entity parameters, barrier selection, and important wiring information are specified on
these drawings. The appendix also contains a list of tested barriers.
WARNING
In a Division 1 area, where an explosion-proof rating is

required, remove power from the transmitter before removing
either enclosure cap. When replacing an enclosure cap, it
must be screwed onto the enclosure until the O-ring is
sufficiently compressed to prevent leakage into the
enclosure. Cap locks may be required.
All pertinent regulations regarding installation in a hazardous

area must be observed.
Before installing a transmitter in a hazardous area, check the rating and approval plates on the transmitter
and Section 9 Model Designation and Specifications for required approvals or certifications.
Explosion-Proof Installation
If the installation is required to be explosion-proof as defined by the National Electrical Code, refer to a
current copy of the Code and the following:
• User-supplied explosion-proof conduit seals (glands) are required on transmitter housing conduit
outlets and any installed junction boxes. See Figure 4-15.
• Explosion-proof glands must provide a good seal. Apply a sealing compound around the sealing
surface if necessary.
• Power wiring conduit entries at the transmitter must have a minimum of five threads fully engaged.
• The enclosure cap must be installed and have a minimum of eight threads fully engaged with no
damaged threads permitted.
• Go to Section 4.6 for wiring connections to the transmitter’s terminals. Refer to Appendix B for
hazardous area installation.
This completes the physical installation.
4-32 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Post-Installation Test
5.0 POST-INSTALLATION TEST

This section provides guidelines for performing a post-installation test or commissioning. These steps
include:
• Performing an installation review to verify that the proper transmitter is installed and that it is
installed correctly. See Section 5.2.
• Testing HART communications and performing a transmitter self test. Exercising the transmitter over
its configured range and checking analog output accuracy. See Sections 5.3 and 5.4.
• Adjusting shutoff valves to set transmitter zero and prepare for on-line operation with live process
pressures. See Section 5.5.
WARNING
Only a certified ammeter may be used in intrinsically

safe circuits.

required, remove power from the transmitter before
removing either enclosure cap.
If a pre-installation test of the transmitter was not performed, review Section 3 Pre-Installation Test as the
described tests can be performed after installation.
5.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
• User configuration data for the transmitter(s)

• HART Communicator (see Section 2 of this manual)
• Laboratory grade digital multimeter (DMM); for calibrating the 4 to 20 mA output signal; a meter
certified for use in intrinsically safe circuits must be used in an intrinsically safe installation
Voltmeter Section Accuracy ±0.01% of reading

Resolution 1.0 mV
Input impedance 10 MΩ
Ammeter Section Accuracy ±0.1% of reading
Resolution ±1 µA
Shunt resistance 15Ω or less
5.2 INSTALLATION REVIEW
1. To ensure the correct transmitter model has been installed, note the model designation and
certifications on the transmitter’s rating and approval plates. Compare this information to the model
specified in user’s documentation (P&I drawing).
September 2004 5-1

Post-Installation test UMSITRPDS3-1
Refer to Section 9 Model Designations and Specifications to confirm that the correct model with the
correct certifications has been installed. Confirm that any needed hazardous area barriers have been
installed and that all other installation requirements have been met.
2. Check that the transmitter is securely mounted. Check transmitter piping. Be sure that all needed
shutoff valves and related equipment have been installed.
3. Check all wiring for correct and secure connection. Refer to Section 4 Installation and to user’s
documentation for wiring diagrams.
4. Check wire runs to be sure that wires are protected from abrasion or other damage, correctly
supported, and physically separated from other signal or power wiring that may cause interference.
5. Check that a current sense resistor of the correct value has been installed.
6. Apply power to the power supply or other loop power source (e.g., controller). Use the DMM to
check power supply output voltage. Note that the transmitter is on whenever power is applied.
5.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Section 4 Installation, in the user’s documentation, or as shown
below. The HART Communicator is a non-polar device.
2. Set the DMM to read 4-20 mA.
250
_
1
+ _ 2
_
Vdc - +
+ 4-20 mA
4
6
_
mA
+
MG00358c
I
O
1 Transmitter terminals 4 HART Communicator; Communicator can be

2 Analog output test terminals connected across the 250Ω range resistor.
3 Digital milliammeter; loop current can also be 5 Controller, recorder, indicator, or other 1-5
shown on the optional transmitter display in Vdc signal input device (e.g. Model 353)
0-100%. 6 DC power supply
FIGURE 5-1 Equipment Connection for System Checkout
5-2 September 2004

5.4 VERIFICATION
This section describes the communication test, communication error check, analog output verification,
and configuration verification. It also contains subsections that involve manipulation of the process
pressures applied to the transmitter.
5.4.1 Communication Test

This test verifies that the HART Communicator and transmitter(s) can communicate properly. From user
configuration documentation, obtain transmitter IDs, addresses, and tags.
1. Turn on the HART Communicator by pressing the I/O key.
− If the Communicator finds a transmitter on a Point-To-Point Network, the Online menu with the
transmitter’s type and tag name is displayed. Go to Section 5.4.2.
− If the Communicator displays: No device found at address 0. Poll?, go to either
step 2 or 3, depending upon the type of network installed.
2. POINT-TO-POINT NETWORK
Check the following: Communicator connections, all other loop connections, power to transmitter,
transmitter address (0), transmitter model number. Repair as necessary and repeat step 1.
3. MULTI-DROP NETWORK
Press Yes (F1) to enter digital mode and search for devices with polling addresses of 1-15.
− If the Communicator finds a transmitter on a Multi-Drop Network, the Online menu with the
transmitter’s type and tag name is displayed. Each transmitter connected to the loop can be
interrogated in sequence. Go to the next Section.
− If the Communicator displays: No device found. Press OK, check all loop connections,
power to transmitters, transmitter addresses (1-15), transmitter model numbers, etc. Repair as
necessary and repeat step 1.
5.4.2 Transmitter Selftest

To test the transmitter’s electronics, perform the following:
1. Establish communication; the Online menu displays. In the Online menu, Press 3 Device Setup.
2. In sequence, press 2 Diagnostics/Service, 2 Simulation/Test, 2 Test and finally 1 Selftest.
3. The message Selftest OK will be shown when the transmitter passes its selftest. If it does not pass, an
error message will be shown.
− If the transmitter passes, go to Section 5.4.3.
− If an error message is displayed, troubleshoot as necessary. Refer to Section 7 Calibration and
Maintenance as needed.
September 2004 5-3

5.4.3 Loop Test

This test verifies that a transmitter is operating properly and is capable of transmitting 0% and 100%
analog output signals to a HART Master. The test applies only to transmitters operating in analog mode.
A transmitter configured for digital mode can be tested by setting its address to zero (0).
1. Establish communication; the Online menu displays. First, press 3 Device Setup, then 2
Diagnostics/Service, 2 Simulation/Test, 1 Simulation, and finally 1 Loop Test.
2. A warning appears: “WARN–Loop should be removed from
automatic control.” If the loop status cannot be changed for
operational reasons, press ABORT (F3) to end this
SITRANS P
procedure and return to the Online menu. If it is okay to
Choose analog output
proceed, go to step 3.
level
3. Remove the loop from automatic control, then press OK 1 4mA
(F4). When OK is pressed, a list of analog output options is 2 20mA
displayed (at right). 3 Other
4 End
4. Press “1” on the keypad or ENTER (F4) to select the 4 mA
ABORT|ENTER
option. The Communicator displays the message “Fld dev
output is fixed at 4.000 mA.” Press OK (F4) to confirm and
proceed with testing or press ABORT (F3) and proceed to
step 8. Note: If using a Model 375 Field
Communicator, see the inside of
5. Read the DMM. The value should be 4 mA. the front cover of this manual.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 using the 20 mA output level. The
DMM reading should be 20 mA.
7. For outputs other than 4 or 20 mA, choose option 3, Other,
and enter any desired output value. The DMM reading
should be the entered value in mA.
8. To end the loop override session, press “4” on the keypad or
the ABORT (F3) softkey. The message “Returning fld dev to
original output” appears.
9. When the message “NOTE–Loop may be returned to
automatic control” appears, return the loop to automatic
control, then press OK (F4). This completes verification of
analog output.
Important
Failure to exit loop override correctly can cause

the transmitter to remain parked at a fixed
current.
5-4 September 2004

5.5 TRANSMITTER ZERO AND SHUTOFF VALVE MANIPULATION

This section describes setting transmitter zero and adjusting shutoff valves for use with live process
pressures. The following commissioning cases are typical examples. Different arrangements may be
advisable depending on the system configuration.
WARNING
Improper operation of the valves can result in serious injury or considerable
material damage.
Read and understand the complete procedure before starting a post-installation

test.
5.5.1 Absolute Pressure

Absolute pressure transmitters with gauge construction or with differential construction can be
commissioned using the following methods.
WARNING
Process material can be hazardous to people and harmful to equipment.
Be sure all process connections are firm and tight. When using a male thread G
1/2 A and installing in zone 0, a flat metal seal e.g. DIN 16258 must be used.
The width of the seal (material strength) must be at least 3 mm.
September 2004 5-5

5.5.1.1 Measuring Gases
Operate the shutoff fittings as described below. Refer to Figure 5-2 to identify the valve being
manipulated.
1. Close all valves.
2. Open the test connection shutoff valve (2B).
3. Apply to the transmitter, through the test connection shutoff fitting (2), a pressure corresponding to
zero.
4. Check zero and correct if necessary.
5. Close the test connection shutoff valve (2B).
6. Open the shutoff valve (4) on the pressure tap.
7. Open process shutoff valve 2A.
Transmitter above the pressure tapping point Transmitter below the pressure tapping point
(normal arrangement) (exception)
1 Transmitter 4 Shutoff valve

2 Shutoff fitting 5 Shutoff valve (optional)
A - Shutoff valve to the process 6 Condensation vessel (optional)
B - Shutoff valve for test connection or 7 Drain valve
venting screw
3 Pressure pipe
FIGURE 5-2 Measuring Gases
5-6 September 2004

5.5.1.2 Measuring Vapor and Liquid
Operate the shutoff valves in the following order. Refer to Figure 5-3 to identify the valves used in the
procedure.
2. Open shutoff valve 2B.
3. Apply to the transmitter, through the test connection shutoff fitting (2), a pressure corresponding to
zero.
4. Check zero and correct if necessary.
5. Close shutoff valve 2B.
6. Open shutoff valve (4) on the pressure tap.
7. Open process shutoff valve 2A.
1 Transmitter
2 Shutoff fitting
A - Shutoff valve to the process
B - Shutoff valve for test connection or venting
screw
3 Pressure pipe
4 Shutoff valve
5 Drain valve
6 Compensation vessel (for vapor only)
FIGURE 5-3 Measuring Vapor and Liquid
September 2004 5-7

5.5.2 Differential Pressure and Flow

Differential pressure and flow transmitters can be commissioned using the following methods.
WARNING
Process material can be hazardous to people and harmful to equipment. Serious
injury or considerable material damage may result if:
• the vent valve and/or the sealing screw are missing or are not sufficiently
tight.
• the valves are operated wrongly or improperly.
In the case of hot process liquid or gas, the individual operating steps must be
performed in rapid succession. Otherwise, the valves and the transmitter may be
over heated leading to damage.
5.5.2.1 Measuring Gases
procedure.
2. Open both shutoff valves (5) at the pressure taps.
3. Open the compensation valve (2).
4. Open one active pressure valve (3A or 3B).
5. Check and correct zero (4 mA) if necessary at zero mbar.
6. Close the compensation valve (2).
7. Open the other active pressure valve (3A or 3B).
5-8 September 2004

Transmitter above the active pressure taps (normal Transmitter below the active pressure taps
arrangement) (exception)
1 Transmitter 7 Blowout valve

2 Compensation valve 9 Condensation vessels (optional)
3 Active pressure valves 10 Active pressure taps
4 Active pressure lines
5 Shutoff valves
FIGURE 5-4 Measuring Gases
5.5.2.2 Measuring Liquids
procedure.
3. Perform one of the following depending upon transmitter location:
− “Transmitter below the active pressure tap” - Open both blowout valves (7) one after the other.
− “Transmitter above the active pressure tap” - Open both vent valves (8) slightly until air-free
liquid emerges.
4. Close both blowout valves (7) or vent valves (8).
5. Open the active pressure valve (3A) and the vent valve at the high-pressure chamber of the
transmitter (1) slightly until air-free liquid emerges.
6. Close the vent valve.
7. Open the vent valve at the low-pressure chamber of the transmitter (1) slightly until air-free liquid
emerges.
September 2004 5-9

8. Close the active pressure valve (2).

9. Open the active pressure valve (3B) slightly until air-free liquid emerges, then close it.
10. Close the vent valve at the low-pressure chamber (1).
11. Open the active pressure valve (3A) by 1/2 turn.
12. Check and correct zero (4 mA) if necessary at zero bar.
14. Open the active pressure valves (3A and 3B) fully.
Transmitter above the active pressure taps (normal Transmitter below the active pressure taps
arrangement) (exception)
1 Transmitter 5 Shutoff valves

2 Compensation valve 7 Blowout valves
3 Active pressure valves 10 Active pressure taps
4 Active pressure lines 12 Gas collectors (optional)
FIGURE 5-5 Measuring Liquids
5-10 September 2004

5.5.3 Measuring Vapor

procedure.
Caution
The measuring result is error-free only when the active pressure lines (4) contain
equal columns of condensate that are at the same temperature. Repeat the zero
adjustment when these conditions are satisfied.
If the compensation valve (2) is opened when the shutoff valves (5) and active
pressure valves (3) are both open, the transmitter (1) may be damaged by flowing
vapors.

2. Open the compensation valve (2).
3. Wait until the vapor in the active pressure lines (4) and in the compensation vessels (13) has
condensed.
4. Open the active pressure valve (3A) and the vent valve at the high-pressure chamber of the
transmitter (1) slightly until air-free condensate emerges.
5. Close the vent valve.
6. Open the vent valve at the low-pressure chamber of the transmitter (1) slightly until air-free
condensate emerges.
7. Close the active pressure valve (3A).
1 Transmitter
2 Compensation valve
3 Active pressure valves
4 Active pressure lines
5 Shutoff valves
7 Blowout valves
10 Active pressure taps
13 Compensation vessels
14 Insulation
FIGURE 5-6 Measuring Vapor
8. Open the active pressure valve (3B) slightly until air-free condensate emerges, then close it.
9. Close the vent valve at the low-pressure chamber (1).
September 2004 5-11

10. Open the active pressure valve (3A) by 1/2 turn.

11. Check and correct zero (4 mA) if necessary at zero bar.
13. Open the active pressure valves (3A and 3B) fully.
This completes the post-installation testing. Disconnect test equipment, connect any disconnected wires,
and restore any removed protective covers on the transmitter or other devices.
5-12 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 On-Line Operation
6.0 ON-LINE CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION

A transmitter is shipped with default data in its memory. Some of this data controls communication and
transmitter operation and cannot be altered. Other data is used by the transmitter to respond to changes in
pressure with a change in output current or HART digital output and is alterable by the user. This data
includes configuration parameters that set up the transmitter for use in a specific process environment.
On-line operation includes local configuration using the magnetic pushbuttons on the transmitter
enclosure and remote configuration and monitoring involving communication between the HART
Communicator (host device) and transmitter.
There are four major subsections. Section 6.1 introduces the local digital display and the local magnetic
pushbuttons. Section 6.2 provides details about configuring and using the transmitter locally; the optional
display must be installed. Section 6.3 describes use of a transmitter that does not have a display. Finally,
Section 6.4 provides the steps to configure and monitor a transmitter from a HART Communicator.
6.1 LOCAL OPERATION AND DISPLAY

2
Local configuration and operation make use of built-in magnetic
pushbuttons and an optional digital display. As shown in the 1
adjacent figure, the display (1) is behind the enclosure cap. The + +
3
magnetic pushbuttons are under the hinged cover (2).
There are three magnetic pushbuttons or keys:

M = Mode Select
MG00364b
Ï = Increase
Ð = Decrease
Use the display and the magnetic pushbuttons as described in
this section. 1 Optional digital display
2 Magnetic pushbutton
(keyboard) access cover
6.1.1 Digital Display 3 Enclosure cap
The local display can show the measured value and engineering unit, sign, status, mode, and output
current; see Figure 6-1. The root sign appears when a square root characteristic is used for differential
pressure or flow. HART communications is indicated by flashing of the communication indicator.
1 Numeric display
2 Unit/bargraph display
3 Root display (flow)
4 Mode/pushbutton disable
5 Status -lower current limit reached
6 Sign for measured value
7 Status - upper current limit reached
8 HART communication indicator
FIGURE 6-1 Digital Display
September 2004 6-1

On-Line Operation UMSITRPDS3-1
6.1.2 Numeric Display

The 5-digit numeric display can be configured to show one of the following.
• Transmitter current output (4-20 mA or %, selection shown in the unit/bargraph display)
• Pressure value, in percent, relative to the set range
• Measured value in a selectable engineering unit (shown on the unit/bargraph display)
Sign for the Measured Value
When the measured value is a negative number, the minus sign is lighted.
Status Arrows
Table 6-1 shows the modes in which the status arrows are active, as well as the meaning of each arrow for
each mode.
TABLE 6-1 Operating Mode and Status Arrows
Operating Mode1 Status Ï (Display) Status Ð (Display)
Mode 2 (set zero2) Upper current limit exceeded Lower current limit exceeded
Mode 3 (set full scale3) Upper current limit exceeded Lower current limit exceeded
Mode 4 (set damping) Upper damping value exceeded Lower damping value exceeded
Mode 5 (set zero blind2) Upper sensor limit exceeded Lower sensor limit exceeded
Mode 6 (set full scale blind3) Upper sensor limit exceeded Lower sensor limit exceeded.
Mode 7 (set zero position Maximum span exceeded by more -----
correction) than 5%
Mode 12 (set root switch point) Square root switch point exceeded Dropped 5% below the square root
by more than 15% switch point
Magnetic Pushbutton Operation Span to be set exceeds the maximum Span to be set is less than the
(Mode 2, 3, 5, or 6) span minimum span
Normal Operation Output current exceeds the upper Output current is below the lower
saturation limit or saturation limit or
Input pressure exceeds the upper Input pressure is below the lower
sensor limit sensor limit
1
Operating Mode selected by pressing the M pushbutton.
2
pmin = minimum operating input pressure; 3 pmax = maximum operating input pressure
Communication Indicator
{ = HART communication is active when the circle is flashing.
6-2 September 2004

6.1.3 Unit/Bargraph Display

This alphanumeric display has five 14-segment fields in the lower right quadrant of the display; see
below. It shows the selected engineering unit as a percentage, engineering unit, or current value. If
desired, a bargraph which represents the percentage pressure value in the range from 0-100% can
alternate with the engineering unit. The bargraph function is turned off in the default setting.
Engineering Unit Bargraph
The unit/bargraph display is also used to display a scrolling error, warning, or alarm message.
6.1.4 Error Message

The message “Error” will be displayed in the Numeric display should a
transmitter hardware or software problem occur. A message describing the
error will scroll horizontally through the unit/bargraph display. This
information is also available at the HART Communicator.
6.1.5 Output Signal Range

The output signal is divided into defined areas.
The transmitter converts the measured pressure into an output current that is normally in the range of 4-20
mA.
Measured values below and above the range limits are also displayed. The UNDER message or OVER
message for the selected unit appears alternately in place of the engineering unit or bargraph. The
overflow range, shown in the following figure, can be set using the HART Communicator. When an
upper or lower range limit is exceeded, the output current remains linear and a status arrow appears on the
transmitter display; see Table 6-1.
September 2004 6-3

1 Linear modulation range

2 Lower limit of the modulation range (default value)
3 Upper limit of the modulation range (default value)
4 Lower fault current value (default value)
5 Upper fault current value (default value)
6 Recommended setting range for lower fault current range and lower modulation range limit
7 Recommended setting range for upper fault current range and upper modulation range limit
6.1.6 Mode Display

An operating mode is selected by pressing the M pushbutton. The selected
mode is shown in the lower left quadrant of the digital display. In the
example at right, mode 4 Electric Damping has been selected and a
damping value of 0.2 has been set.
6-4 September 2004

6.2 LOCAL OPERATION WITH THE MAGNETIC PUSHBUTTONS

The transmitter can be configured locally using the magnetic pushbuttons, shown below. Table 6-2 shows
the operating modes and configuration parameters accessed by pressing the M pushbutton. These
configuration parameters are also available using the HART Communicator.
Note
A selected mode will time out after about 2 minutes of pushbutton inactivity and
the displayed parameter value will be stored.
A polling address of zero (0) must be stored for the magnetic pushbuttons to
function. The magnetic pushbuttons will be disabled if a polling address of 1-15
has been stored, as indicated by a C in the lower left quadrant of the display.
September 2004 6-5

TABLE 6-2 Parameters Accessible Using the Magnetic Pushbuttons

Configuration Mode Increase/Decrease Pushbuttons (Keys) Description See
Parameter M 1 Ï Increase Ð Decrease Ï and Ð3 Section
Measured value --- --- --- --- Output current in mA or % 6.2.10
or input pressure in
selected engineering units
Error display --- --- --- --- Error 6.2.7
Zero 2 Increase current Decrease current Set to 4 mA Output current in mA 6.2.2
Full scale 3 Increase current Decrease current Set to 20 mA Output current in mA 6.2.2
Electric damping 4 Increase damping Decrease damping --- Range 0.0 to 100.0 seconds 6.2.3
Zero “blind 5 Increase pressure Decrease pressure Set to start of Zero in the selected 6.2.4
setting” scale 0 engineering unit
Full scale “blind 6 Increase pressure Decrease pressure Set to upper Full scale in the selected 6.2.4
setting” measuring limit engineering unit
Zero for position 7 --- --- Press both Re-zero when oriented 6.2.5
correction 2 pushbuttons from vertical
simultaneously
Output Current 8 Increase current Decrease current Switch on/off Constant output current 6.2.6
Failsafe output 9 --- --- Select Failsafe output current; 6.2.7
current limits set by user
Pushbutton 10 --- --- Select 0 = None 6.2.8
enable/disable LA = All disabled
LO = All disabled except
zero
LS = All disabled except
zero and full scale
L = Write protect; HART
operation disabled
Characteristic, DP 11 --- --- Select lin = linear 6.2.9
only srlin = square root (linear
to switch point)
sroff = square root
(switched off up to switch
point)
Set square root 12 Increase Decrease --- Parameter range 5 to 15% 6.2.9
switch point of flow
Measured value 13 --- --- Select Unit of pressure (input 6.2.10
display value) or output current in
either mA or 0-100%
Unit of pressure 14 --- --- Select See Figure 6-3 for 6.2.11
engineering units
Notes:
1. Press the M pushbutton to change the mode.
2. IMPORTANT: Absolute pressure transmitters - the zero is established in a vacuum! A zero adjustment to a ventilated absolute
transmitter will cause an error!
3. Press both pushbuttons simultaneously.
DP = differential pressure
6-6 September 2004

6.2.1 Cancel Pushbutton Disable and Write Protection

A pushbutton disable (LA, LO, LS, or L) can be entered locally or from the HART Communicator. To
enable the pushbuttons, press and hold the M pushbutton for at least 5 seconds.
Another pushbutton disable (LL) can be entered from the Communicator. This disable must be canceled
using HART. See Section 6.4.9 to cancel the LL disable.
6.2.2 Set/Adjust Zero and Full Scale

Zero and full scale can be set or adjusted from the magnetic pushbuttons. Modes 2 and 3 provide access.
Both forward and reverse acting characteristics are accommodated.
6.2.2.1 Theoretical Relationships

Setting Zero and Full Scale
First, specify the desired zero and full scale analog output currents, typically 4 mA and 20 mA
respectively. Operating process pressures are then specified: pmin and pmax, for minimum and maximum
operating pressures. When specifying these input pressures, always refer to the rating plate for model
number, measuring span, and other performance related information.
Apply the input pressures and set the output currents using the local magnetic pushbuttons or the HART
Communicator. Input pressures can be supplied by the process or by test equipment. Set zero first and
then set full scale, since setting zero does not affect the span and setting full scale does not affect zero.
The relationship between the measured pressure and the resulting current output is linear, except when a
square root output characteristic is selected. The output current for a linear relationship can be calculated
using the following equation.
I = output current
p − p min
I= ∗ 16 mA + 4 mA p = input pressure for I
p max − p min pmin = minimum operating input pressure (MA in leporello)
pmax = maximum operating input pressure (ME in leporello)
An example of the use of this equation is given below.

1. Given: a transmitter with a measuring range of 0 to 232 psi. The operating range is to be 29 to 203
psi.
2. Apply 29 psi to the transmitter. Press the M (mode) pushbutton to set the transmitter to mode 2. Set
the zero by pressing the Ï and Ð pushbuttons simultaneously for about 2 seconds. An output current
of 4 mA is then set.
3. Apply 203 psi. Press the M pushbutton to set the transmitter to mode 3. Set the full scale by pressing
the Ï and Ð pushbuttons simultaneously for about 2 seconds. An output current of 20 mA is then set.
4. Calculate the output current for other input pressures. Apply the desired pressure and check the output
current against the calculated value.
September 2004 6-7

Given
Set Zero
Set Full Scale
Calculate Output Current
Adjusting Zero and Full Scale from a Single Reference
Zero and full scale can be adjusted to any desired current using only one reference pressure. This is
particularly useful if the pressures necessary for zero and full scale are unavailable. Note that after the
adjustment is completed, the measuring range on the rating plate may not match the new range.
Required to be known: The reference pressure, present zero value, and present full scale value.
Calculate the current to be set at pzn using the first formula. Then calculate the current to be set at pfsn
using the second formula.
pref − p zn I = output current

pzn I = ∗ 16 mA + 4 mA
p fso − p zo pref = applied reference pressure
pfso = old full scale (MEact in leporello)
pzo = old start of scale (MAact in leporello)
pref − p zn pfsn = new full scale (MEnom in leporello)
pfsn I = ∗ 16 mA + 4 mA pzn = new start of scale (MAnom in leporello)
p fsn − p zn
An example of the use of these equations is given below. The figure following the example illustrates
these steps.
1. Given: A transmitter with a measuring range of 0 to 160 psi. Change the span to 20 to 140 psi. A
reference pressure of 110 psi is available.
2. Apply the reference pressure.
3. Calculate zero (20 psi) using the first formula.
4. Press the transmitter’s M pushbutton to go the mode 2. Set the output current to 13 mA.
5. Calculate full scale (140 psi) using the second formula.
6. Press the transmitter’s M pushbutton to go to mode 3. Set the output current to 16 mA.
6-8 September 2004

Given
Set Zero
Set Full Scale
6.2.2.2 Practical Applications

Set Zero and Full Scale
The steps below should be followed to set the transmitter zero output current to 4 mA and the full scale
current to 20 mA.
1. Apply a pressure representing zero.
2. Press the M pushbutton until mode 2 appears.
3. Set zero by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton to set the display to 4 mA.
4. Press the M pushbutton to save the setting and go to mode 3.
5. Apply a pressure representing full scale.
6. Set full scale by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton to set the full scale output current value in the
display.
7. Press the M pushbutton to save the setting.
September 2004 6-9

Adjust Zero and Full Scale
If only a single reference pressure is available, calculate the currents to be adjusted using the formulas and
procedure in Section 6.2.2.1 subsection Adjusting Zero and Full Scale from a Single Reference.
1. If the transmitter does not have a display and an external milliammeter must be connected to read
analog output current, remove the field terminals enclosure cap and connect the milliammeter.
WARNING

safe circuits.

2. Apply a known reference pressure.

4. Set zero by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton.
5. Press the M pushbutton to save the setting and go to mode 3.
6. Set full scale by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton.
6.2.3 Electric Damping

Set the electronic damping time constant to between 0-100 seconds, in steps of 0.1 seconds, using the
magnetic pushbuttons.
2. Press the Ï or Ð pushbutton to set the damping to the desired value.
3. Save the setting by pressing the M pushbutton.
6.2.4 Blind Setting of Zero and Full Scale

Modes 5 and 6 are used to set or adjust zero and full scale respectively with no input pressure applied to
the transmitter. It is also possible to change between forward acting and reverse acting characteristics
here.
6.2.4.1 Theoretical Relationships

To adjust zero and full scale:
1. Select the desired engineering unit.
2. Select mode 5 and press and press the Ï or Ð pushbutton to adjust the lower pressure value that is to
be equivalent to a 4 mA output. (Note that the pressure adjustment will not go below zero even if the
lower sensor limit (LSL) is below zero.)
6-10 September 2004

3. Select mode 6 and press the Ï or Ð pushbutton adjust the upper pressure value that is to be
equivalent to a 20 mA output. (The assumed pressure will be the upper sensor limit.)
After adjusting, the measuring span specified on the rating plate may no longer match the new span.
A turn-down up to a maximum 1:100 (span ratio = r, turn-down) can be reached depending on the series
and the measuring range.
The relationship between the measured pressure and the generated output current is linear, except for the
square root characteristic in differential pressure transmitters.
Example:
1. Given: a transmitter with a measuring span of 0 to 232 psi. Adjust it to a measuring span of 29 to 203
psi without applying a reference pressure. (The assumed pressure will be zero psi or the lower sensor
limit whichever is greater.)
2. Press the M pushbutton to select mode 5.
3. Adjust zero to 29 psi by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton.
4. Press the M pushbutton to save the value and select mode 6.
5. Adjust full scale to 203 psi by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton.
6. Press the M pushbutton to save the value.
6.2.4.2 Practical Applications

Set zero and full scale (blind):
1. Select the pressure input engineering unit.
3. Press the Ï and Ð pushbuttons simultaneously and hold for 2 seconds. Zero is set to lower sensor
limit.
4. Press the M pushbutton to save the value and select mode 6.
5. Press the Ï or Ð pushbuttons and hold for 2 seconds. Full scale is set to the upper sensor limit.
6. Press the M pushbutton to save the value.
Adjust zero and full scale (blind):

1. Select the pressure input engineering unit.
3. Adjust zero by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton. This value will produce 4 mA.
4. Press the M pushbutton to save the input pressure value and select mode 6.
5. Adjust full scale by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton. This value will produce 20 mA.
6. Press the M pushbutton to save the input pressure value.
September 2004 6-11

6.2.5 Zero Adjustment (Position Correction)

The zero error resulting from a non-vertical installation position can be easily corrected. This procedure
can be performed locally using the magnetic pushbuttons or remotely using the HART Communicator.
Section 7 Calibration and Maintenance discusses the cause of this zero error.
Important
To zero an absolute pressure transmitter, a vacuum must be applied! The zero

adjustment of a ventilated absolute pressure transmitter will cause an erroneous
zero set.
1. Ventilate or evacuate the transmitter.

− Ventilate for pressure, differential pressure, flow, and flanged level transmitters.
− Evacuate for absolute transmitters to <0.1% of the measuring span.
2. Select mode 7 by pressing the mode pushbutton.
3. Set zero by simultaneously pressing the Ï and Ð pushbuttons for 2 seconds; 0.000 will appear in the
display.
4. Press the M pushbutton until no mode number is shown. An output current of 4 mA is generated.
6.2.5.1 Zero-Point Alignment at Absolute Pressure

Performing a position correction to an absolute pressure transmitters may not properly calibrate zero if a
vacuum is not available as the reference pressure. In this case, the three options below are available.
• Perform a lower sensor alignment using the Communicator.
Carry out a lower sensor alignment at an applied, known and sufficiently stable reference pressure.1
With this type of alignment, the digital displayed measured value is adjusted. The output current is
relative to this displayed value.
• Set the current in mode 2 of local operation.
Use the formula below to calculate the current to be set for a known, sufficiently stable reference
pressure. (See the footnote below.)
( p ref − p setpt )
I= ∗ 16 mA + 4 mA
( p fso − p zo )
In model 2, enter this current with the Ï and Ð pushbuttons and save the value by pressing the M
pushbutton.
With this setting, the digital displayed value is not changed.

• Change the value of the start of measurement in mode 5 of local operation:
1
If the applied process pressure is known and sufficiently stable, it can be used instead of the reference pressure.
Enter mode 4, when necessary, and enter an appropriate damping value.
6-12 September 2004

Change the display, when necessary, by use of mode 13, so that the physical unit selected in mode 14
is in display mode.
Calculate the difference between the measured pressure and the known and sufficiently stable
reference pressure. (See the footnote on the previous page.)
Change to mode 5. Add the calculated difference with the correct sign to the displayed measured start
position. Enter this calculated value using the Ï and Ð pushbuttons and save the value by pressing
the M pushbutton.
6.2.6 Fixed Current Output

The transmitter can be switched to a fixed current output mode for loop troubleshooting. Here, the analog
output current will not vary with process pressure or level variations.
The fixed current output can be set locally or remotely to 3.6 mA, 4.0 mA, 12.0 mA, 20 mA, or 22.8 mA.
Other values can be set using the HART Communicator.
1. Press the M pushbutton until mode 8 is shown on the transmitter display.
2. Set zero by simultaneously pressing the Ï and Ð pushbuttons for 2 seconds; the selected current will
appear in the display.
3. Select the desired current by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton.
4. To cancel the fixed current mode, press the M pushbutton.
6.2.7 Failure Current

The failure current is the current that is to be output in the event of a fault or alarm. The default values are
3.6 mA and 22.8 mA. These values can be changed using the HART Communicator.
1. Press the M pushbutton to display mode 9.

2. Select the desired fault current by pressing the Ï or Ð pushbutton.
3. Press the M pushbutton to save the selection and exit mode 9.
September 2004 6-13

6.2.8 Pushbutton and Function Disable

Mode 10 is used to disable some or all magnetic pushbutton functions. In addition, a write protect
function can be activated to prevent changing of saved parameters. There are five options as shown in
Table 6.3.
TABLE 6-3 Pushbutton and Function Disable Options
Symbol Explanation
no symbol No disable.
LA Input pushbuttons disabled. Operation via HART is enabled.
LO Zero can be set; all other functions are disabled. Operation via HART is enabled.
LS Only zero and full scale can be set (see Section 6.3); all other functions are disabled.
Operation via HART is enabled.
L Write protect enabled. Operation by HART disabled.
LL is another pushbutton disable that is available in HART; see Section 6.4.9. The disable option symbol
will appear in the lower left quadrant of the digital display. To cancel a disable option, see Section 6.2.1.
To select a pushbutton or function disable option:

1. If LO or LS is to be selected, first press the M pushbutton to go to mode 13. Select either Current in
mA or Current in %. Otherwise, a change in the output variable will not be detected when an arrow
pushbutton is pressed.
2. Press the M pushbutton to go the mode 10. Select a disable option by pressing either arrow
pushbutton.
3. Press the M pushbutton to save the selection.
Note
When a transmitter is delivered without a display, disable option LS is active. If

the transmitter is to be permanently operated without a display, be sure option LS
remains active.
6.2.9 Flow Measurement (Differential Pressure only)

Select the characteristic of the output current as follows:
• Linear - proportional to the differential pressure
• Square Root - proportional to the flow
Below the square root function’s switch point the output current can have a linear characteristic or be
switched off. See Figure 6-2.
To select the characteristics:

1. Press the M pushbutton to enable mode 11.
2. Press either arrow pushbutton to select the desired characteristic.
6-14 September 2004

5. Press either arrow pushbutton to select an switch point between 5 and 15%.
6. Save the selection by pressing the M pushbutton.
Note
If the input pressure is selected for display in mode 13 and the square root
characteristic in mode 11, the differential pressure corresponding to the flow and
the root sign are displayed.
FIGURE 6-2 Switch Point of the Square Root Characteristic
September 2004 6-15

6.2.10 Select Measured Value to be Displayed

Mode 13 has three options:
• Display output current in mA
• Display output current in % (of the set measured range)
• Display input pressure in engineering units selected in mode 14
To make a selection:
2. Press either arrow pushbutton to select the desired option.
6.2.11 Select the Displayed Input Pressure Engineering Unit

Mode 14 selects the engineering units that are to be assigned to the displayed input pressure (selected in
mode 13). Available selections are shown in Figure 6-3. The engineering unit set using HART (Section
6.4.11) has no effect on this local setting.
1. To select the engineering unit:
3. Press either arrow pushbutton to step through the available engineering units list.
If the capacity of the digital display is exceeded, 9.9.9.9.9 will appear.
6-16 September 2004

bar
mbar
mm water column (20°C/68°F)
Inch water column (20°C/68°F)
Feet water column (20°C/68°F)
mm mercury column
Inch mercury column
psi
Pa
KPa
MPa
g/cm2
kg/cm2
MG00361a
Torr
ATM
Inch water column (4°C/39°F)
mm water column (4°C/39°F)
Calculated and displayed according to the dimension

set with HART.
FIGURE 6-3 Displayable Engineering Units
September 2004 6-17

6.3 LOCAL OPERATION WITHOUT A DISPLAY OR WITH ACTIVATED KEYLOCK

When a transmitter is ordered without a display, pushbutton disable mode LS is the default setting.
Limited operation from the magnetic pushbuttons is available. This section describes local operation
when the display is not present or when the magnetic pushbuttons or several modes have been disabled.
Refer to Section 6.2.8 for the pushbutton and function disable options. To cancel magnetic pushbuttons
disable, refer to Section 6.2.1. In most instances, it will be possible to set zero and full scale, as described
in the section below.
6.3.1 Set Zero and Full Scale

The differences between set and adjust were discussed in Section 6.2.2.1. The same conditions and
mathematical relationships apply whether operating with or without a display.
Use the following procedure to set the output current for zero to 4 mA and the full scale to 20 mA.
1. Apply a reference pressure corresponding to zero.
2. Press both arrow pushbuttons simultaneously so that the output is set to 4 mA.
4. Apply a reference pressure corresponding to full scale.
5. Press both arrow pushbuttons simultaneously so the output is set to 20 mA.
If the output current is not set but adjusted continuously, the currents will need to be calculated; refer to
Section 6.2.2.1 as needed. It is possible to make an adjustment for zero, full scale, or for both values.
To set zero and full scale:

1. Clean the enclosure to prevent dirt from entering.
2. Unscrew the end cap covering the electrical terminals.
WARNING

safe circuits.

6-18 September 2004

3. Connect a DC ammeter to the test terminals in the field terminal assembly.

4. Apply a reference pressure.
5. Set the zero output using the arrow pushbuttons. The set value is saved when the pushbutton is
released.
6. Apply a reference pressure.
7. Press and hold the M pushbutton.
8. Set the output current by pressing either arrow pushbutton. The set value is saved when the
pushbutton is released.
September 2004 6-19

6.4 REMOTE CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION BY HART

This section describes operation of the transmitter using the Model 275 HART Communicator.
Alternatively, PC software such as SIMATIC PDM can be used. Refer to the operating instructions or on-
line help provided with the software. Refer to Section 2 for details concerning use of the Communicator.
Appendix A has the complete On-Line Configuration Map (an on-line Map for the Model 375 Field
Communicator is at the back of this manual). Refer to the map as necessary to navigate the menus. The
HART command set is constantly being enhanced and the specific commands available with the HART
Communicator at hand may be different from those described here.
Most procedures in this section begin at the Online menu, which is SITRANS P: ♥
shown here. The pulsing heart in the upper right corner of the display Online Í
indicates that the HART Communicator and transmitter are 1 Pres 0.004 inH2O
communicating with each other. 2 Type Diff PN160
3 Î Device setup
In most of the procedures, text will appear above the function
keys. These keys are immediately below the Communicator
display. Refer to the table in Section 2 for function key (softkey) HELP | SAVE
descriptions.
Note: If using a Model 375 Field
Write Protect Communicator, see the inside of
the front cover of this manual.
If an L is present in the lower left quadrant of the transmitter’s
display, write protect is enabled. Operating or configuring the
transmitter from a remote HART device will not be possible.
To allow the HART device to operate or configure the transmitter:

1. Open the pushbutton access cover on the transmitter.
2. Press and hold the M pushbutton for at least 5 seconds. The letter L will extinguish and commands
from the HART device will be accepted.
Write protect can be enabled either from the transmitter magnetic pushbuttons or from the HART
Communicator. There are several levels of write protect. Refer to Section 6.2.8 or 6.4.9 for an explanation
of write protect levels and methods of enabling.
6.4.1 Process Data

The Online menu displays pressure and transmitter type information. By pressing 3 on the HART
Communicator keyboard, the Device Setup menu can be displayed and several other screens displaying
process data can be accessed.
For example:
1. In the Online menu, press 3 Device Setup.
2. In the Device Setup menu, press 1 Process Variables.
3. The Process Variables display appears. It shows active data for pressure, % range, analog output, and
sensor temperature.
Refer to the Online Configuration Map in Appendix A; the display of active data is indicated by a plus
sign (+) following the menu text.
6-20 September 2004

6.4.2 Setting Zero and Full Scale

Zero and full scale can be set or adjusted from the HART Communicator. Following are the steps to set
zero and full scale. To adjust zero and full scale locally, refer to Section 6.2.2.
Zero and full scale can also be set or adjusted in the Detailed Setup menu. See the Online Configuration
Map in Appendix A for the path.
1. Apply a reference pressure that represents zero.
3. In the Device Setup menu, press 3 Basic Setup.
4. Press 4 in the Basic Setup menu and type a value for zero. Press the ENTER softkey to enter the zero
value and return to the Basic Setup menu or press ESC to return to the Basic Setup menu without
changing the zero value.
5. Apply a reference pressure representing full scale.
6. Press 5 in the Basic Setup menu and type a value for full scale. Press the ENTER softkey to enter the
full scale value and return to the Basic Setup menu or press ESC to return to the Basic Setup menu
without changing the zero value.
6.4.3 Blind Setting of Zero and Full Scale

Zero and full scale can be set without applying a reference pressure. Both values are freely selectable,
within sensor limits, as described above. The maximum turn down is 100:1, depending upon the
transmitter series and measuring range. Section 6.2.4 contains a discussion of the theoretical relationships
and an example.
6.4.4 Zero Adjustment for Position Correction

The zero error resulting from a non-vertical installation position (electrical enclosure directly over the
sensor) can be easily corrected. This procedure can be performed locally using the magnetic pushbuttons
or remotely using the HART Communicator. This procedure should be performed after transmitter
installation. If necessary, it can be performed on the test bench if the transmitter is exactly oriented as it
will be when installed.
Important
To zero an absolute pressure transmitter, a vacuum must be applied! The zero

adjustment of a ventilated absolute pressure transmitter will cause an erroneous
zero to be set.
Note
The useful measuring range is reduced by the pre-pressure. For example, at a pre-
pressure of 40 inH2O (1.45 psi), the useful measuring range of a 14.5 psi
transmitter is reduced to 0 to 13.05 psi.
September 2004 6-21

1. Install and pipe the transmitter. Ventilate or evacuate the transmitter.

− Ventilate for pressure, differential pressure, flow, and flanged level transmitters.
− Evacuate for absolute transmitters to <0.1% of the measuring span.
2. In the Online menu, press 3 Device Setup on the HART Communicator.
3. Press 3 Basic Setup in the Device Setup menu.
4. In the Basic Setup menu, press 3 Position Correction. A warning will appear: “Loop should be
removed from automatic control.” Press the ABORT or OK softkey as appropriate.
5. A second warning will appear: “This will affect sensor calibration.”
6. The message “Apply 0 input [atmospheric pressure] the sensor” will appear. Press ABORT or OK as
appropriate.
7. A “correction successful” message will appear followed by a Loop may be returned to automatic
control message.
6.4.5 Electric Damping

Electric damping can be adjusted within the range of 0 to 100 seconds.
1. Press 3 Device Setup in the Online menu.
2. Press 3 Basic Setup in the Device Setup menu.
3. Press 6 Damping in the Basic Setup menu or cursor down, using the down arrow, to 6 Damp. Type a
new damping value and press ENTER. Press ESC to exit the display without making any changes.
6.4.6 Fast Measured Value Acquisition (fast response mode)

This mode is designed exclusively for special applications such as fast acquisition of pressure spikes, such
as a compressor surge. Here, the internal measured value acquisition is accelerated at the cost of accuracy.
There is an increase in low-frequency noise in the measured value. For best accuracy, configure the
transmitter for use at its maximum measuring span.
2. Press 4 Detailed Setup in the Device Setup menu.
3. Press 2 Signal Condition in the Detailed Setup menu.
4. Press 6 Measuring Speed in the Signal Condition menu.
5. Use the arrow pushbuttons to select: Fast, Medium, or Slow.
6. Press the ENTER softkey to save the selection and return to the Signal Condition menu.
6-22 September 2004

6.4.7 Fixed Current Output

To aid in loop troubleshooting, the transmitter can be placed in a constant current mode.
To enable fixed current operation:

2. In the Device Setup menu, press 2 Diagnostics/Service.
3. In the Diagnostics/Service menu, press 2 Simulation.
4. Press 1 Simulation in the Simulation Test menu.
5. Press 1 Loop Test in the Simulation menu. A Warning message will appear: “Loop should be
removed from automatic control.” Press OK or ABORT as appropriate.
6. In the Choose Analog Output Level display, select: 4 mA, 20 mA, other, or End by pressing the
appropriate number key. A message will appear confirming that the output is fixed at the selected
value and a “C” will appear at the lower left of the transmitter display. Press OK or ABORT as
appropriate.
To discontinue fixed current operation:

1. Navigate to the Choose Analog Output Level display as described above
2. Select option 4 End. A message will appear stating that the loop can be returned to control and the
transmitter display will no long contain the “C.”
6.4.8 Fault Current

The lower and upper fault currents can be set in this procedure. Both indicate a hardware or firmware
failure, a sensor break, or reaching an alarm limit (diagnostic alarm). In the case of a diagnostic alarm,
ERROR will appear in the transmitter display, as described in Section 6.1.4. (Refer to the HART
Communicator manual or NE 43, Standardization of the Signal Level for Fault Information from Digital
Transmitters with Analog Output Signals, dated 18.01.94 for a detailed error list.)
2. In the Device Setup menu, press 4 Detailed Setup.
3. In the Detailed Setup menu, press 3 Output Condition.
4. In the Output Condition menu, press 1 Analog Output.
5. In the Analog Output menu, press 3 Alarms.
6. In the Alarms menu, select: 1 AO alarm type, 2 Alarm LRV, or 3 Alarm URV.
7. Type the new value and press ENTER or press ESC to return to the previous menu without storing a
changed value.
September 2004 6-23

6.4.9 Disabling the Transmitter Magnetic Pushbuttons and Write Protection

The table below correlates a symbol that appears in the lower left quadrant of the transmitter display with
the type of pushbutton disabling.
TABLE 6-4 Pushbutton and Function Disable Options
Symbol Explanation
no symbol No disable.
LA Transmitter magnetic pushbuttons disabled; operation via HART is enabled. At the
transmitter, press the M pushbutton for 5 or more seconds to release.
LO Zero can be set; all other functions are disabled. At the transmitter, press the M
pushbutton for 5 or more seconds to release.
LS Only zero and full scale can be set (see Section 6.3); all other functions are disabled. At
the transmitter, press the M pushbutton for 5 or more seconds to release.
L Write protect enabled; operation by HART disabled. At the transmitter, press the M
pushbutton for 5 or more seconds to release.
LL Input pushbuttons fully disabled. The disable can be released only via HART.
Magnetic pushbuttons operation is as described in Section 6.3 when option LS or LO is active. LL is a

pushbutton disable that is available in HART.
To select a disable option or to disable a previous selection:

2. In the Device Setup menu, press 2 Diag/Service.
3. In the Diag/Service menu, press 3 Control Modes.
4. In the Control Modes menu, press 1 Local Keys Control Mode. The following options appear:
− Enabled (transmitter magnetic pushbuttons is fully enabled)
− Disabled (local reset) LA
− Zero only enabled LO
− Zero and Span enabled LS
− Disabled (HART) LL
5. Cursor to the desired selection; press ENTER to save the selection and return to the previous menu.
6. Press SEND to immediately send the selection to the transmitter. Confirm the selection by noting the
2-letter display in the lower left of the transmitter’s display.
To select write protection:

2. In the Device Setup menu, press 2 Diag/Service.
3. In the Diag/Service menu, press 3 Control Modes.
4. In the Control Modes menu, press 3 Set Write Protect.
5. In the Protection menu, press either 1 No or 2 Yes. Press ENTER to save the selection and return to
the previous menu. Press ABORT to return to the previous menu without saving any changes.
6-24 September 2004

6.4.10 Measured Value Display

The transmitter display can show the output current in mA, the output current in 0-100%, or the input
pressure in a selected engineering unit. To select the displayed parameter and, if input pressure is desired,
the engineering unit:
3. In the Detailed Setup menu, press 4 Device Information
4. In the Detailed Information menu, press 5 Local Meter.
5. In the Local Meter menu, press 3 Local Display Units.
6. Cursor to the desired display unit. The current selection is shown at the top of the list and slightly
offset to the left.
6.4.11 Select Pressure Engineering Units

This selection is used to choose the engineering unit assigned to the input pressure.
3. In the Basic Setup menu, press 2 (Engineering) Unit.
4. The presently selected unit is shown at the top of the list and slightly offset to the left. Cursor to the
desired engineering unit using the Communicator’s Up and Down Arrow keys. Press ENTER to save
the selection and return to the previous menu. Press ESC to return to the previous menu without
saving a new selection.
6.4.12 Display/Bargraph
In the display mode, the selection made in Section 6.4.10 will appear in the lower right quadrant of the
display. The factory setting of the bargraph function is “off.”
3. In the Detailed Setup menu, press 4 Device Information.
4. In the Detailed Information menu, press 5 Local Meter.
5. In the Local Meter menu, press 4 Bargraph.
6. The current status of the bargraph is shown at the top of the list and slightly offset to the left. Cursor
to the desired status: Not Active or Active. Press ENTER to save the selection and return to the
previous display. Press ESC to return to the previous menu without saving a new selection.
September 2004 6-25

6.4.13 Sensor Trim

Using sensor trim it is possible to set the characteristic of the transmitter at two adjustment points. This
has the effect of improving the measurement accuracy by setting the sensor’s upper and lower values
close to the range of process pressure values. The adjustment points are freely selectable within the
sensor’s nominal range.
Transmitters not turned down at the factory are adjusted at 0 psi and the nominal upper range limit. Those
turned down at the factory are adjusted at the lower and upper limits of the set measuring range.
Application Examples:
• If the desired span is 725 psi for a transmitter with a maximum pressure of 925 psi, then to achieve
the greatest possible accuracy for this value, make the upper sensor adjustment at 725 psi.
• A 925 psi transmitter is turned down to 58 to 101.5 psi. To achieve the greatest possible accuracy,
make the lower sensor adjustment point at 58 psi and the upper adjustment point 101.5 psi.
Note
Pressure sources must be sufficiently accurate.
Either of the trimming procedures below can be cancelled without storing a new trim setting by pressing
ABORT. The factory trims can be restored in the Diagnostics/Service menu. Refer to the Online
Configuration Map in Appendix A.
6.4.13.1 Trimming the Lower Sensor Adjustment Point

In this procedure, the reference pressure representing the lower sensor adjustment point is applied and the
transmitter is instructed to accept this pressure. This represents an offset shift of the characteristic, as
shown in Figure 6-4.
1. Apply a reference pressure representing the lower sensor adjustment point.
4. In the Diagnostics/Service menu, press 4 Trim.
5. In the Trim menu press, 2 Sensor Trim.
6. In the Sensor Trim menu, press 3 Lower Sensor Trim. A warning message will appear: “Loop should
be removed from automatic control.” Take the appropriate action and press OK to continue. A second
warning will appear: “This will affect sensor calibration.” Again, press OK to continue.
7. The “Apply low pressure” message will appear. Press OK to continue. A “Pressure OK when pressure
is stable” message will appear. Press OK to continue.
8. The applied value is displayed next. The value can be changed from the Communicator’s keyboard.
Press ENTER to store the value or press ABORT to exit the procedure without storing a value.
9. Remove the reference pressure or go to the next section to set the upper sensor adjustment point.
6-26 September 2004

6.4.13.2 Trimming the Upper Sensor Adjustment Point

A pressure representing the upper sensor pressure is applied and the transmitter is instructed to accept this
press. This corrects the characteristic slope; see Figure 6-4. Adjusting the upper sensor adjusting point
will not affect the lower sensor adjusting point. The upper point must be greater than the lower point.
1. Apply a reference pressure representing the lower sensor adjustment point.
5. In the Trim menu press, 2 Sensor Trim.
6. In the Sensor Trim menu, press 4 Upper Sensor Trim. A warning message will appear: “Loop should
be removed from automatic control.” Take the appropriate action and press OK to continue. A second
warning will appear: “This will affect sensor calibration.” Again, press OK to continue.
7. The “Apply hi pressure” message will appear. Press OK to continue. A “Pressure OK when pressure
is stable” message will appear. Press OK to continue.
8. The applied value is displayed next. The value can be changed from the Communicator’s keyboard.
Press ENTER to store the value or press ABORT to exit the procedure without storing a value.
9. Remove the reference pressure.
A Output characteristic
B Characteristic after lower sensor adjustment
C Characteristic after upper sensor adjustment
FIGURE 6-4 Sensor Trim
September 2004 6-27

6.4.14 D/A Trim

There are two trim options: D/A trim and Scaled D/A trim. Since they operate similarly, only the D/A
trim is described here.
Important
Trimming the D/A converter should not be necessary and should be performed
only after all other options have been exhausted.
1. Remove the end cap from the enclosure terminal compartment. Connect a digital milliammeter to the
provided terminals.
WARNING

safe circuits.


4. In the Diagnostic/Service menu, press 4 Trim.
5. In the Trim menu, press 3 Trim Analog Output.
6. In the Trim Analog Output menu, press 1 D/A trim. A warning message will appear: “Loop should be
removed from automatic control.”
7. The message “Connect reference meter” will appear; see step 1. The message “Setting field device
output to 4 mA” will appear. Press OK to continue. Type a new value and press ENTER. The
message “Field device output 4.000 mA equal to reference meter?” will appear. Press 1 Yes or 2 No.
If Yes is pressed, go to the next step. If No is pressed another opportunity to enter a new setting will
be provided.
8. The message “Setting field device output to 20 mA” appears. Press OK to continue. Type a new value
and press ENTER. Press 1 Yes or 2 No. Press OK to store the value and return to the previous menu.
6.4.15 Transmitter Current Adjustment

The current output by the transmitter can be adjusted independent of the input pressure signal and
measuring circuit. This permits the output current to be adjusted to compensate for external inaccuracies,
for example, the +/-0.5% tolerance of a current-to-voltage conversion resistor where 4 mA must yield
exactly 1V and 20 mA must yield exactly 5V. These trims can be cancelled in the Diagnostics/Service
menu and factory set trims again installed.
6-28 September 2004

1. Determine the output currents required to compensate for the external inaccuracy.
2. Connect a reference milliammeter to the current terminals.
WARNING

safe circuits.


6. In the Trim menu, press 3 Trim Analog Output.
7. In the Trim Analog Output menu, press 1 D/A Trim. A warning will be displayed: Loop should be
removed from automatic control. Press OK to continue.
8. Connect a reference digital milliammeter to the transmitter current terminals and press OK.
9. A “Setting field device output to 4 mA” message will appear. Press OK to continue.
10. Type a new current output value that corrects for the external inaccuracy (e.g. 4.001). Press ENTER
to continue. A query “Field device output 4.001 mA equal to reference device?” Press 1 Yes or 2 No
as appropriate.
11. A “Setting field device output to 20 mA” message is displayed. Press OK to continue.
12. Type a new current output value that corrects for the external inaccuracy. Press ENTER to continue.
13. A query “Field device output 20.000 mA equal to reference meter” appears? Press ENTER to
continue. A confirming message displays followed by a “Loop may be returned to automatic control”
message. Press OK to return to the Trim Analog Output menu.
6.4.16 Factory Calibration (Manufacturer Trims)

The factory calibration can be recalled (restored) in four steps.
• Restore the field current adjustment.
• Restore the field sensor zero adjustment (position correction)
• Restore the field pressure corrections (zero adjustment and sensor adjustment)
• Restore field selected parameters relevant to measured value processing, such as zero full scale,
electric damping, display unit, current adjustment, zero adjustment (position correction, sensor
adjustment, measuring speed, alarm current limits, alarm setting, and overflow current ranges.
September 2004 6-29

To restore manufacturer trims:

3. In the Diagnostic/Service menu, press 5 Restore Manufacturer Trims.
4. Select from the menu the desired trims to be restored and press ENTER.
6.4.17 Device Information

In the Device Information menu, the transmitter’s physical configuration and materials and its software
and hardware revision numbers can be recorded. Most of this information is included in the factory
configuration; however, it can be edited as needed.
• Ranges and limits
• Common device information
• Sensor information such as flange type, O-ring material, fill fluid, and diaphragm material
• Remote seal specifics such as type and fill
• Local meter selections such as type and local display units
• Hardware and software revision numbers
Refer to the Online Configuration Map in Appendix A for details.
6.4.18 Flow Measurement (Differential Pressure)

The output current characteristic can be set to linear, proportional to differential pressure, or square root,
proportional to flow. There are two square root settings that affect the current output characteristic from
zero to the switch point (i.e. switch point). Figure 6-2 illustrates the three possible settings.
3. In the Basic Setup menu, press 7 Transfer Function.
4. In the Pressure Transfer Function menu, use an arrow key to cursor to the needed characteristic and
press ENTER to save the selection and return to the previous menu.
6.4.19 Diagnostic Functions

Communication with the HART Communicator enables activation and evaluation of numerous diagnostic
functions. The simulation of pressure and temperature measured values is possible, in addition to
calibration and service timers, min/max pointers, and limit value monitoring components.
A diagnostic warning or alarm can be configured to monitor limit values (e.g. monitoring of current
saturation).
Diagnostic Warning: The transmitter in which the diagnostic event has occurred notifies the HART
Communicator of the warning. The moving text “Diagnostic Warning” scrolls across the transmitter
display, alternating with the unit/bargraph display.
6-30 September 2004

Diagnostic Alarm: The transmitter goes into a fault state. The message ERROR will appear and either
“Diagnostic Warning” or “Diagnostic Alarm” will scroll across the transmitter display, alternating with
the unit/bargraph display.
The default setting for all warnings and alarms is OFF. To set and enable:
3. In the Diagnostics/Service menu, press 1 Diagnosis
4. In the Diagnosis menu, press 3 Warnings/Alarms. Refer to the Online Configuration Map in
Appendix A and to the HART Communicator’s help screens.
6.4.19.1 Operating Hours Counter

Two operating hours counters with non-volatile memories are provided for the electronics and the sensor.
These counters are not re-settable. If power is removed and later reapplied, the counters begin counting
from the previous time. To read the operating hours counters:
1. In the Online menu, press 3 Device Setup
2. In the Device Setup menu, press 2 Diagnosis/Service
3. In the Diagnosis/Service menu, press1 Diagnosis
4. In the Diagnosis menu, press 2 Operating Hours
5. In the Operating Hours menu, press 1 Operating Hours Electronics or 2 Operating Hours Sensor. The
total operating hours will be displayed.
6.4.19.2 Calibration Timer and Service Timer

A two-stage time can be set to ensure regular calibration of the electronics and servicing of the
transmitter. A calibration or service warning appears after the first time expires. On expiration of a second
time, set as a time difference, a diagnostic alarm is signaled and a fault current is output.
A warning or alarm must be acknowledged before work can be performed on the transmitter. Timers can
then be reset and switched off temporarily.
For operating/acknowledging warnings and alarms in the HART Communicator, the following applies:
As long as the warning/alarm limit has not been reached:

• “Reset” resets the timer and begins again with the counter at 0. Monitoring is still active.
• “Acknowledge” has no effect, the timer continues running and the monitoring is still active.
• “Reset and deactivate” stops the timer, resets it, and deactivates the monitoring.
September 2004 6-31

When the warning/alarm limit has been reached:

• “Acknowledge” resets the warning/alarm message but the timer continues to run. In this state, no new
alarm or warning is possible since the time limits will still have to be exceeded.
• “Reset” resets the warning/alarm message the timer. At the same time, the alarm or warning is
acknowledged. The timer runs again immediately from zero and will respond again when the
warning/alarm limit is exceeded. The next calibration interval is therefore immediately activated.
• “Reset and ActivateW/A” resets the arning/alarm message and resets and deactivated the timer.
6.4.19.3 Min/Max Pointer

The maximum positive and negative excursions of the input pressure, sensor temperature, and electronics
temperature are stored in non-volatile memory for later recall. Min/Max pointers are updated during
simulation. Stored values can be reset. Refer to the Online Configuration Map in Appendix for the path to
the min/max pointer and to Figure 6-5 for an example.
FIGURE 6-5 Pressure Min/Max Pointer Example
6.4.19.4 Monitoring the Saturation Current

Transmitter current output in the saturation range can be monitored with a simple limit value component.
This component is configured and activated using the HART Communicator.
Two times need to be configured: response time and hold time. The response time represents the length of
time the current output may remain saturated before an alarm is triggered and the transmitter outputs its
set fault current. The hold time is the duration of the alarm.
In example 1 in Figure 6-6, the response time begins at t1 when the output current, due to an increase in
input pressure, reaches the configured saturation limit. At t2, the response time ends, the hold time begins,
and the transmitter outputs the fault current. At t3, the hold time expires and the alarm is cancelled even
6-32 September 2004

though the current has not dropped below the saturation limit. When the input pressure finally drops, the
transmitter output current decreases from the fault current, through the saturation current and then begins
to follow the input pressure.
In the second example, the duration of the input pressure spike that drives the current output to the
saturation limit is shorter than the configured response time. Consequently, the transmitter will output the
saturation current but not output a fault current.
In the third example, the input spikes below minimum pressure. At t2 the response time expires and the
hold time begins. The transmitter outputs the fault current at t2 and holds that output until the hold time
expires at t3.
FIGURE 6-6 Saturation Monitoring Examples
6.4.20 Simulation
In the simulation mode, pressure and temperature values can be simulated within the transmitter without
the need for an external input signal. Transmitter circuitry can be exercised and the resulting values
output to an I/O module, controller, or other device to test the loop.
Simulation values are entered at the HART Communicator keyboard as described below. A pressure
simulation can employ either a “fixed value” or a “fixed ramp,” with the number of steps configurable.
September 2004 6-33

Simulation data is stored in RAM only. Consequently, when a simulation is ended, simulation values are
deleted. Note that changing the temperatures by simulation has no effect on the measured pressure value.
Also, as long as the simulation is active, the transmitter will not react to changes in process pressure.
Figure 6-7 is a block diagram of a transmitter showing the measuring and simulation blocks.
Simulation (Pressure and Temperature)

3. In the Diagnostics/Service menu, press 2 Simulation Test.
4. In the Simulation Test menu, press 1 Simulation to display the Select menu. Choose one of the
following.
1 Loop Test: To test the loop, press 1. A warning message will appear: “Loop should be removed
from automatic control.” Press OK to continue. Then select either 4 ma, 20 mA, or a user-
entered value and press ENTER. Select End or ABORT to exit and return to the previous
menu. Press OK to return to the previous menu with the selected current sustained. To end
the simulation, press either 4 End or ABORT and return to the previous menu.
2 Inputs: From the menu that appears, select the pressure and/or temperature to be simulated.
Pressure simulation can employ either a fixed value or ramped values (specify starting value,
end value, step duration, and number of steps). Follow the on-screen prompts. End the
simulation and return to the previous menu by pressing ABORT.
FIGURE 6-7 Simulation Circuit Diagram
6-34 September 2004

6.4.21 Self Test and Master Reset

A transmitter self test or master reset can be initiated from the HART Communicator.
3. In the Diagnostics/Service menu, press 2 Simulation Test.
4. In the Simulation/Test menu, press 2 Test
5. In the Test menu, press 1 Self Test to direct the transmitter to perform a self test of its internal
circuitry or press 2 Master Reset to direct the transmitter to reset its internal circuitry. Follow the on-
screen prompts. “Init” will momentarily flash in the display.
September 2004 6-35

6-36 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Calibration And Maintenance
7.0 CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE

This section discusses calibration, preventive maintenance, troubleshooting, assembly replacement,
software compatibility, and return shipments.
The Calibration section contains a brief discussion of the cause of position induced zero shift and it
provides references to needed calibration procedures. The Preventive Maintenance portion has procedures
that are employed to protect the reliability of the transmitter. Should a malfunction occur, procedures in
the Troubleshooting section can help minimize downtime. The Assembly Removal and Replacement
section provides step-by-step assembly replacement procedures. Later sections discuss recommended
spare and replacement parts, software compatibility, and return shipments.
WARNING

Tools and Equipment Required
The procedures in this section can require the following equipment. See the Note below.
• Model 275 HART Communicator or Model 375 Field Communicator
Note: If using a Model 375 Field Communicator, see the inside
of the front cover of this manual.
• Laboratory grade digital multimeter (DMM) for troubleshooting and calibrating the 4 to 20 mA
output signal; a meter certified for use in intrinsically safe circuits must be used in an intrinsically
safe installation
Voltmeter Section Accuracy ±0.01% of reading

Resolution 1.0 mV
Input impedance 10 MΩ
Ammeter Section Accuracy ±0.1% of reading

Resolution ±1 µA
Shunt resistance 15Ω or less
• 24 Vdc power supply; for bench setup
• Resistor 250Ω ±1%, carbon, ¼ watt; for bench setup
• Set of Phillips and flat-blade screwdrivers
• Set of open-end or box-end wrenches
• Larger tweezers, 4" to 6"
September 2004 7-1

Calibration and Maintenance UMSITRPSD3-1
7.1 CALIBRATION
Calibration can involve adjusting zero to eliminate any position-induced zero shift, setting zero on-line,
and trimming the digital to analog converter. Transmitter calibration should be checked annually and a
calibration performed only if the transmitter is found to be out of tolerance. Trimming the D/A converter
should not be necessary and should be performed only after all other options have been exhausted.
Zero Shift Explanation
Zero shift can be predicted. Transmitters are calibrated at the factory in a vertical position (enclosure
directly over sensor). If a transmitter is installed (or will be installed) in another orientation, it may need
re-zeroing to eliminate position-induced zero shift, depending upon transmitter type and direction of
rotation. Maximum zero shift is 1.2 inches H2O (299 Pa).
• There is no zero shift with transmitter rotation as long as diaphragm orientation with respect to the
earth does not change.
For example, in the drawings below, rotating the transmitter from the vertical (center drawing) either
90° clockwise (right drawing) or counterclockwise (left drawing) will not cause a zero shift because
diaphragm orientation with respect to earth has not changed.
+ +
+
+
+
+
Diaphragm Plane for MG00362a
these three orientations
• Maximum zero shift occurs when rotating the transmitter causes diaphragm orientation with respect
to the earth to be changed 90°.
For example, in the drawings below, rotating the transmitter from the vertical (center drawing) either
90° clockwise (right drawing) or counterclockwise (left drawing) will cause maximum zero shift
because the diaphragm orientation changes from vertical to horizontal.
Diaphragm Plane
Diaphragm Plane Diaphragm Plane

MG00362a
7-2 September 2004

Calibration Procedure Section References
Calibration Needed Local (Pushbutton) HART Communicator

Position-induced zero Section 6.2.5 Section 6.4.4
On-line zero Section 6.2.2 Section 6.4.2
Calibrate DAC --- Section 6.4.14
This completes calibration of the transmitter.
7.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Preventive maintenance consists of periodic inspection of the transmitter, cleaning the external surface of
the transmitter enclosure, draining condensate from conduit, and blowing-down or purging impulse
piping to keep them free of sediment. Perform preventive maintenance at regularly scheduled intervals.
7.2.1 Transmitter Exterior Inspection

The frequency of the inspection will depend on the severity of the transmitter’s environment.
1. Inspect the exterior of the transmitter enclosure for accumulated oil, dust, dirt, and especially any
corrosive process over-spray.
2. Check that both enclosure caps are fully threaded onto the enclosure, compressing the O-ring between
the cap and the enclosure. The O-ring must not be cracked, broken, or otherwise damaged.
3. Inspect the display viewing glass for cleanliness and damage. Replace the enclosure cap assembly if
the glass is damaged or missing.
4. Inspect both enclosure electrical conduit entrances for possible moisture leaks. An unused conduit
entrance must be plugged and sealed. Inspect the cable clamps of all watertight cable conduits for
loose clamps and deteriorated sealing material. Tighten clamps and reseal as necessary.
5. Inspect conduit drain seals for obstructions.
6. Inspect transmitter and mounting bracket hardware for tightness. Tighten loose hardware as
necessary. Consider steps to reduce vibration.
7. Inspect process connection blocks for evidence of leakage at the impulse pipe connections and at the
block interface to the transmitter end caps. As necessary, add sealant to pipe threads, tighten block
bolts, and replace block Teflon® seals.
7.2.2 Transmitter Exterior Cleaning

After an exterior inspection of the transmitter, the enclosure can be cleaned with the transmitter operating.
1. Clean the enclosure (except enclosure cap glass) and process manifold with a mild, nonabrasive liquid
detergent, and a soft bristle brush, sponge, or cloth. Rinse the weatherproof enclosure with a gentle
spray of water.
Remove an excessive accumulation of process residue. Hot water or air may be used to flush away
process residue if the temperature of the cleaning medium does not exceed the operating temperatures
of the transmitter as listed in Section 9.3 Specifications.
2. Clean enclosure cap glass with a mild, nonabrasive liquid cleaner and a soft, lint-free cloth.
September 2004 7-3

7.2.3 Transmitter Enclosure Interior Inspection

Remove the two enclosure caps periodically to inspect the interior of the transmitter enclosure.
WARNING

Important
Do not remove a transmitter enclosure cap in an area where the environmental

substances can contaminate the transmitter interior.
• No accumulation of dust, dirt, or water (condensate) should be present inside the enclosure. If
condensate is present, either install a conduit drain or repair the installed drain (see Figure 4-15).
• Check that all wire connections are tight.
7.2.4 Transmitter Calibration

An annual calibration check should be performed to ensure that the transmitter is within specifications.
Refer to Section 7.1 for details.
7.2.5 Impulse Piping

To ensure accuracy and continued satisfactory performance, impulse piping must be kept clean and
inspected for damage.
Sediment or other particles must not clog or collect in piping or the pressure chamber of the process
manifold’s process connection blocks. A build up of residue can cause faulty measurement.
1. Inspect impulse piping for loose, bent, or cracked piping. Replace damaged piping.
2. At regular intervals, blow down the piping without passing line fluids containing suspended solids
through the process manifold’s process connection blocks.
The time interval between blowdowns is determined by the user’s previous experience with such
systems or determined by evaluating system performance only after the transmitter has been in
operation for a period.
7-4 September 2004

7.3 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section provides guidance and procedures to assist in identifying and correcting a malfunctioning
transmitter. Section 7.0 lists needed tools and equipment.
It is recommended that all documentation associated with the transmitter, including piping and loop
wiring diagrams and configuration documentation, be obtained and made available to maintenance
personnel to facilitate troubleshooting.
The most common symptom of a malfunctioning transmitter is incorrect, erratic, or no output. A

malfunction can affect the transmitter’s analog output (4-20 mA) or its digital (HART) output.
Furthermore, a malfunction can be the result of external forces and not a transmitter fault at all. Section
7.3.1 discusses troubleshooting techniques for the analog output. Section 7.3.2 discusses troubleshooting
techniques for the digital output.
General transmitter troubleshooting steps:

• Record all failure symptoms. Record the values and messages on the transmitter display. The display
is discussed in Section 6 On-Line Calibration and Operation.
• Confirm the values and messages recorded above by connecting a HART Communicator (or DMM)
and recording the values and messages shown by the Communicator. Navigate to those displays that
show active data. Refer to Appendix A Online Configuration Maps to roam the Communicator’s
menus.
• Test the suspect unit by performing a transmitter self test or transmitter reset and again note the
values and messages on the transmitter display and on the Communicator.
• Apply a known pressure (or level) and note all values and readings on the transmitter display and
Communicator. See Section 5 Post Installation Tests for sample procedures.
• Check impulse piping, loop wiring, power supply, and related connections and equipment.
• Check the transmitter configuration.
7.3.1 Analog Output

An analog output problem can appear as one of the following:
• No output or very low output – There is no transmitter output or the output remains low despite
changes in the process.
• High output – Transmitter output remains high despite changes in the process.
• Erratic output – Transmitter output varies when process does not.
• Sluggish response – Transmitter seems to respond to process changes very slowly.
Often an analog output problem is caused by incorrect transmitter configuration or by something external
to the transmitter.
September 2004 7-5

Transmitter Troubleshooting Steps
Several troubleshooting avenues are presented below. Select the appropriate path for the encountered
symptoms.
• Record the readings in the numeric display, status arrows, and sign. Note the reading(s) in the
unit/bargraph display, particularly any static or scrolling message. The display is discussed in Section
6 On-Line Calibration and Operation.
− If the display is blank or partial characters appear, connect the HART Communicator in the loop.
If the Communicator shows correct data, replace the display. If the problem remains, replace the
electronics module. If the Communicator does not show correct data, use a voltmeter to confirm
that power is applied to the transmitter. If power is applied, replace the electronics module.
− ERROR appears on the display – There is a hardware or software malfunction. Replace the
electronics module. If the problem remains, replace the measuring cell.
− A static or scrolling message appears in the unit/bargraph display - This is a notice of a
malfunction or a change in a status, warning, or alarm. Read the message and respond
accordingly. Check the transmitter configuration and process conditions.
− Warning/Alarm indication - Check the configuration of: Calibrate interval, Service interval, and
AO saturation. The warning/alarm may be an indication that a configured time has elapsed or that
the analog output has saturated. Check transmitter configuration and process conditions.
• Perform a transmitter self test or reset. Refer to Section 6.4.21 Self Test and Master Reset. Again
check data and messages and repair as indicated.
Initially the numeric display will momentarily show “Init” and then display the current output (unless
the display is set to read another parameter or ERROR appears). The unit/bargraph display will show
the engineering unit (unless a fixed message or scrolling message appears or the unit/bargraph display
is set to the bargraph mode). If a failed test message appears, repair as necessary.
• Check the pressure to current conversion. Connect a pressure source to the transmitter and connect
the HART Communicator in the loop. Set the pressure source to produce a 4 mA transmitter output
current. In the Online menu, press 3 Device Setup and then press 1 Process Variables to observe the
active data. Refer to Appendix A Online Configuration Map as needed. Change the pressure to
produce a 20 mA output current.
If a display is not installed, a milliammeter can be connected after removing the enclosure cap for
access to the 4-20 mA test terminals.
• Place the transmitter in the simulation mode to apply a fixed or ramping current to the loop. Refer to
Section 6.4.20 Simulation. Troubleshoot the controller or device receiving the transmitter output
signal. Check the loop wiring at all loop-connected devices.
If selected loop currents are significantly out of tolerance, or loop current cannot be set, replace the
electronics module (see Section 7.4). If the transmitter passes the fixed current (loop override) test,
continue troubleshooting.
DSIII electronic modules are interchangeable. If troubleshooting points to a failed display or electronics
module, substitute a known good assembly for another transmitter or from spare parts stock. See Section
7.4 for assembly replacement steps. Replacing the electronics module will necessitate reconfiguration of
the transmitter since configuration data are stored in the module.
Check Impulse Piping
7-6 September 2004

• Check that high and low pressure pipe connections are not reversed.
• Check for leaks or blockage.
• Check for entrapped gas in liquid lines or for liquid in dry lines.
• Check for sediment in transmitter’s process connection blocks.
• Check that blocking valves are fully open and that bypass valves are tightly closed.
• Check that the density of the fluid in piping is unchanged.
Check Loop Power Supply/Wiring

• Check loop power supply for blown fuse or tripped circuit breaker.
• Check for 10.5 Vdc minimum across loop +/- terminals in transmitter terminal compartment.
• Check power supply output voltage: 15 Vdc minimum; 45 Vdc maximum (30 Vdc in an intrinsically
safe circuit).
• Check polarity of loop wiring at both power supply and transmitter.
• Check for loose or broken loop wiring at power supply terminals, supply barriers (if used), junction
boxes, and transmitter terminal compartment.
• Check for disconnected or broken current sense resistor.
• Check for short between shield and loop + wire.
• Check for accumulation of moisture in transmitter terminal compartment.
• Check loop cable for proper type and length.
• Check for electrical interference between the loop cable and any adjacent cables in a cable tray or
conduit.
Check Transmitter Configuration

• Check for proper operating mode: analog, address 0; digital, address 1-15.
• Check for appropriate transfer function (linear or square root).
• Check the switch point if the square root output current characteristic (i.e. transfer function) is
configured.
Check for a Transmitter Stuck in Fixed Current (Loop Override) Mode

• Re-enter Fixed Current mode from HART Communicator Online menu and properly exit the mode.
Check for Variable Process Fluid Flow

• Install mechanical dampers in process pressure piping.
• Select a higher damping value (software filter time constant).
Check Primary Element

• Check that primary element is correctly installed.
• Check element for damage and leaks.
• Note any changes in process fluid properties that can affect output.
September 2004 7-7

7.3.2 Digital Output (Communication)

A malfunctioning digital output can indicate a defective communication circuit. More commonly,
however, these problems are caused by an incorrect or poor installation. It is possible to install a
transmitter such that the 4-20 mA signal is correct, yet the digital HART signal is not.
The most common symptom of a communication problem is the inability to locate a transmitter on the
loop using a HART Master Device, such as the HART Communicator. Typical messages from the HART
Communicator include: device disconnected, no device found, or communication error.
If communication problems occur, check the following. Refer to the specifications in Section 9 and to
Section 4 Installation as necessary.
• Check that loop resistance is between 250Ω and 1100Ω.
• Check that electrical noise on the loop is not excessive: power supply ripple should not exceed 12
mVp-p.
• Check that there are no high inductance devices in the loop (I/P for example). Install a HART
communication filter across such a device.
• Check that the power supply voltage is high enough for the installed total loop resistance. Refer to
Section 4 Installation.
• Refer to Section 4 Installation and confirm that loop cable length is not excessive.
• Check that the HART Master is connected across a load.
7-8 September 2004

7.4 ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

The display, electronics module, measuring cell, and terminal board assemblies are not user-serviceable;
however, they may be replaced. This section describes removal and replacement of these assemblies.
Refer to Section 7.0 for a list of tools. Figure 7-1 shows transmitter major assemblies.
WARNING

This device has a modular structure. Use only Siemens

authorized assemblies. When servicing, refer to the
instructions enclosed with replacement parts.
1 Enclosure cap with/without viewing glass 7 Measuring Cell (gauge construction shown;
2 Digital Display includes measuring cell cable and measuring
3 Threaded hex standoff cell board)
4 Electronics Module and display cable -- Terminal Board assembly (inside enclosure
5 Measuring Cell board cap adjacent to Field Terminals)
6 Enclosure
FIGURE 7-1 Transmitter Exploded View
The transmitter configuration must be reviewed after replacing either the electronics module (4) or the
measuring cell (7). The following table identifies the parameters that are stored and those that will need to
be entered.
September 2004 7-9

Device Parameters After Replacing Electronics Module or Measuring Cell
Parameter Description Stored Not Stored Configuration

(2) Dependent (1)
Damping x
AO alarm type x
Alarm LRV/URV x
Saturation alarm activation x
Transmission functions x
Square root switch point x
Pressure units x
Polling address x
Tag x
Mechanical construction: x
electronics/sensor
Min/max pointer x
Zero calibration x
Upper/lower sensor calibration points x
Service interval x
Minimum span x
Measurement limits
Sensor limits
Explosion protection x
Sensor serial number x
Working hour meter, sensor x
Working hour meter, electronics x
Firmware/Software revision x
Min/max pointer, electronics x
Calibration interval, electronics x
Saturation alarm duration x
Local display unit x
Current calibration
Message x
Descriptor x
Date x
Final assembly number x
Bargraph activation x
Write protection mode x
Hardware revision x
Device revision x
Unit tracking x
Notes:
(1) Column specifies sensor data that remains after changing electronics or sensor.
(2) Dependent on electronics module version. Check the parameters and configure as needed.
7-10 September 2004

7.4.1 Display Assembly

Removal
1. Remove power from the transmitter.
2. Place an anti-static wrist strap on your wrist and connect its ground lead to the transmitter
enclosure ground screw.
3. Unscrew the enclosure cap nearest the tag plate.
4. While holding the display assembly, loosen and remove the two Phillips-head screws securing the
display circuit board to two hex stand-offs. See Figure 7.2.
5. Grasp the keyed display cable connector at the electronics module and disconnect it. Do not pull on
the display cable. See the figure below.
Installation
1. Plug the keyed display cable into the connector in the electronics module.
2. Orient the display for best viewing (see Section 4.5 Installation as needed) and install the two
Phillips-head screws. Tighten the screws to 5 in lbs (0.55 N-m).
3. Install the enclosure cap by turning it clockwise until the O-ring contacts the enclosure. Turn the cap
one additional turn to compress the O-ring.
4. Remove the wrist strap.
C73451-A407-B300
1 ES: 008
6
8 FW: 11.02.03
7 5
2
3
MG00353a
MG00353a
4
1 Display mounting screws, qty 2 3 Electronics Module
2 Display assembly 4 Display assembly, circuit board side
5 Display cable connector and ribbon cable
6 Pull tab to remove Electronics Module
Note: Enclosure cap removed. 7 Hex stand-offs securing Module, qty 2
8 Label with firmware (FW) level
FIGURE 7-2 Display Assembly Installed and Partially Removed
September 2004 7-11

7.4.2 Replacing the Electronics Module

A larger tweezers (4"-6") is very useful in the procedure below.
Removal
1. Fasten an anti-static wrist strap on your wrist and connect its ground lead to the transmitter
enclosure ground screw.
2. If present, remove the display as described in the previous section.
3. Refer to Figure 7-2 and remove the two hex standoffs (7) using a 3/32" (7 mm) hex wrench. Grasp the
pull tab (6) and withdraw the electronics module (3) from the enclosure. As shown in Figure 7-3, the
measuring cell cable (4) is several inches long. Fold the module down so the back of the assembly is
visible, as shown.
Important
Do not allow the electronics module to hang on the measuring cell cable. The
measuring cell board and the cable are part of the measuring cell assembly.
Damaging the board or cable will require replacement of the entire measuring cell.
4. On the back of the electronics module, locate the measuring cell board (2) and the measuring cell
cable (4). The measuring cell board plugs into the electronics module and two flexible clips (3) secure
the board. Grasp the board by inserting tweezers between the clips and the board. Slightly rock the
board while applying outward pressure to ease the connectors apart.
5. Set the electronics module aside in an anti-static bag.
4 1 Electronics Module, rear view; module shown pulled

out of transmitter enclosure and folded down
2 Measuring cell board
3 Flexible clips securing measuring cell board, qty 2
5 4 Measuring cell cable, loop between feed-thru pins
5 Feed-thru pins, qty 2, in transmitter enclosure
2 6 Feed-thru pin receptacles, qty 2
6
3
MG00353a
FIGURE 7-3 Electronics Module Removal and Installation
7-12 September 2004

Installation
1. Remove the new electronics module from its anti-static bag.
2. Carefully align the connector on the measuring cell board with the connector on the back of the new
electronics module. Press the board onto the electronics module until the board is seated fully and the
flexible clips grip the board.
3. Move the electronics assembly close to the housing. Guide the measuring cell cable so that it folds
between the two long feed-thru pins (5). Align the mounting holes in the electronics module with the
holes in the casting. Press the electronics module into the enclosure. The two long pins must enter the
two single pin receptacles (6) on the back of the module. Press the module in while gently rocking the
module until it can be pressed in no farther.
4. Install the two hex standoffs. Tighten the standoffs securely but do not over tighten and damage the
electronics module.
5. Install the display as described in the previous section.
7. Apply power to the transmitter. Refer to the table in Section 7.4 and to Section 6 On-Line
Configuration and Operation and configure the transmitter.
7.4.3 Measuring Cell Assembly Removal and Replacement

The measuring cell assembly is not field repairable. It must be replaced if defective. The transmitter must
be removed to a workbench to accomplish removal and replacement.
A measuring cell assembly consists of the cell, process flanges (differential construction, as specified),
measuring cell cable, measuring cell board and an O-ring.
Removal
1. Refer to Section 7.6 Transmitter Replacement and disconnect and remove the transmitter from
service. Move transmitter to service shop.
2. Remove the enclosure cap for access to the display and electronics module.
3. If an optional display is installed, remove it as described in Section 7.4.1. Store the display in a static
protective bag.
4. Remove the electronics module as described in Section 7.4.2.
5. Use a 3/32" (2.5mm) Allen wrench to loosen the enclosure rotation screw, located below the tag
plate.
September 2004 7-13

6. Separate the measuring cell from the enclosure.

− Differential construction - Clamp the end cap portion of the measuring cell in a bench vise with
the transmitter in an upright position. Use wood blocks to protect the end caps from damage by
the vise. Rotate the enclosure clockwise while watching the measuring board and cable to be sure
that they rotate freely.
− Gauge construction - Use an open-end wrench to rotate the cell counterclockwise while watching
the measuring board and cable to be sure that they rotate freely. Wrench size will depend upon
the type of process connection.
7. As the measuring cell and enclosure separate, guide the measuring cell board through the neck of the
enclosure and set the enclosure aside.
8. Clean all process material and other contamination from the entire assembly and pack the assembly
for return or disposal. Include applicable MSDSs (Material Safety Data Sheets).
Installation
1. Unpack the replacement measuring cell.
If a greased O-ring is packed separately, go to step 2. If the O-ring is installed on the measuring cell
tube, in a groove next to the threaded portion of the tube, go to step 3. Keep the greased O-ring clean
and be careful not to wipe away the grease.
2. Pass the measuring cell board and measuring cell cable through the O-ring. Seat the O-ring in the
groove in the measuring cell neck adjacent to the threaded portion of the neck. Keep the greased O-
ring clean and be careful not to wipe away the grease.
3. Differential Construction only - Position the measuring cell in a bench vise with the measuring cell’s
tube pointing up. Use wood blocks to protect the end caps from damage.
4. Carefully pass the measuring cell board and cable through the enclosure neck and into the enclosure.
5. Screw the measuring cell into the enclosure. As the assembly is rotated, be certain that the measuring
cell cable and board rotate freely.
− Differential construction - Rotate the enclosure clockwise until the following conditions are met.
• the enclosure setscrew should be in-line with the raised area in the center of the process
flange; see Figure 7-4
• the enclosure rotation arrow should be to the left of the enclosure setscrew
• the neck dimension shown in Figure 7-4 is correct
− Gauge construction - Using an open-end wrench, rotate the measuring cell until the following
conditions are met.
• the enclosure setscrew should be in-line with the enclosure rotation arrow
• the neck dimension shown in Figure 7-4 is correct
7-14 September 2004

A
2 A
MG00353a
1
Differential Construction Gauge Construction
Dimension A = 0.1" +/- 0.03 (2.6 mm +/- 0.75)
1 Enclosure rotation arrow (enclosure rotation reference point)

2 Ramp-shaped recessed area indicating enclosure rotation range
3 Enclosure setscrew, use 3/32 (2.5 mm) Allen screw
4 Tag plate
FIGURE 7-4 Measuring Cell Alignment and Insertion Depth
6. Tighten the enclosure setscrew to 30.1 to 30.9 in lbs (3.4 to 3.6 Nm).
7. Get the electronics module and connect the measuring cell board as described in Section 7.4.2.
8. Install the electronics module as described in Section 7.4.2.
9. Install the display as described in Section 7.4.1.
10. Install the end cap by turning it clockwise until the O-ring contacts the enclosure. Turn the cap one
additional turn to compress the O-ring.
11. Apply power to the transmitter; see Section 3 for wiring diagrams. Refer to the table in Section 7.4
and to Section 6 On-Line Configuration and Operation and configure the transmitter.
12. Reinstall transmitter as described in Section 7.6 Transmitter Replacement.
September 2004 7-15

7.4.4 Terminal Board Assembly Removal and Replacement

Perform this procedure to replace the terminal board assembly. The terminal board assembly usually can
be replaced at the installation site; if not, remove the transmitter for bench servicing.
Removal
1. Use the proper procedures to shut down the process.
2. Remove power from the transmitter and remove the enclosure cap at the “Field Terminals” end of the
enclosure to access the terminal board.
3. Retrieve the wrist strap from the maintenance kit and snap it on your wrist. Connect the ground clip
to the transmitter ground screw.
4. Mark and then disconnect the loop wiring using a medium-size Phillips blade screwdriver, disconnect
the wiring.
5. Remove two terminal board mounting screws and external tooth lockwashers.
6. Pull the terminal board straight out of the compartment.
7. Discard the defective board.
Installation
1. Retrieve the wrist strap from the maintenance kit and snap it on your wrist. Connect the ground clip
to the transmitter ground screw.
2. Remove the replacement terminal board assembly from its packaging.
3. Note the two long feed-thru pins in the transmitter enclosure. These two pins must enter two
receptacles on the circuit board side of the terminal board assembly. Carefully align the two mounting
holes in the terminal board with the threaded holes in the enclosure casting and gently press the
terminal board into place until it seats inside the enclosure. Do not use excessive force; do not bend
the two long feed-thru pins!
4. Insert two terminal board mounting screws and lockwashers and tighten to 12 in-lbs (1.4 Nm).
5. Connect loop wiring.
7. As necessary, reinstall the transmitter in the field.
8. Restore power to the transmitter. Calibration is not required.
7.5 NON-FIELD-REPLACEABLE ITEMS

Certain components are not replaceable except at the factory. These are:
• Enclosure cap display Agency regulations do not permit field replacement of a broken or
viewing glass: damaged glass as this would invalidate the enclosure’s explosion proof
rating. Replace the entire damaged enclosure cap assembly.
• RFI feed-thrus Potted
7-16 September 2004

7.6 TRANSMITTER REPLACEMENT

To replace a transmitter, refer to the procedure below and one or more of the following Sections in the
Installation section of this Manual:
• 4.4 Mechanical Installation
• 4.5 Mechanical Installation, All Models
• 4.6 Electrical Installation
• 4.7 Hazardous Area Installation
WARNING
Disconnecting the transmitter from the loop must not release process material that
is hazardous to people or can damage equipment. Depressurize the transmitter and
drain process material as necessary.
Removal
1. Perform proper plant shut down procedures.
2. Remove power from transmitter. Open by-pass valves and close shut-off valves.
3. Remove the enclosure cap for access to the terminal board. Tag and disconnect loop wiring.
4. Disconnect the electrical conduit. Refer to Section 4.6 Electrical Installation. Replace the enclosure
cap.
5. Disconnect the transmitter from the process. Depressurize and drain impulse piping. Refer to the
Mechanical Installation section for the transmitter at hand; see above list.
− Pressure or Flow Transmitter – Disconnect all process piping (e.g., impulse piping or 3-valve
manifold). Then remove the transmitter from its mounting bracket.
− Level Transmitter – Remove the transmitter from the mating flange.
Important
Before returning a transmitter, remove all process material. Material Safety Data
Sheets for all hazardous process materials in contact with the transmitter and the
potential consequences of exposure must be enclosed with the transmitter.
Installation
1. Fasten transmitter to mounting bracket. Refer to Mechanical Installation section for transmitter at
hand.
2. Connect transmitter to process.
3. Connect conduit and loop wiring. Refer to Sections 4.5 Mechanical Installation, All Models and 4.6
Electrical Installation.
4. Orient display and enclosure for best viewing of the display. Refer to Section 4.5 Mechanical
Installation, All Models.
5. Apply power to transmitter and configure. Refer to Section 6 Online Configuration and Operation.
6. Check all connections, then open shut-off valves and close by-pass valves. As needed, refer to
Section 5 Post Installation Test.
September 2004 7-17

Caution
Do not exceed the Maximum Overrange ratings when placing the transmitter into
service. Properly operate all shut-off and equalizing valves. Ratings are listed on
the rating plate and in Section 9 Model Designation and Specifications.
7. Check transmitter configuration as described in Section 3.4 Reviewing Configuration Data and
Section 6 Online Configuration and Operation.
8. If needed, perform mounting induced zero shift calibration (see Section 7.1).
7.7 MAINTENANCE RECORDS

An accurate record keeping system for tracking maintenance operations should be established and kept up
to date. Data extracted from the record may serve as a base for ordering maintenance supplies, including
spare parts. The record may also be useful as a troubleshooting tool. In addition, maintenance records
may be required to provide documentary information in association with a service contract. It is suggested
that, as appropriate, the following information be recorded:
1. Date of service incident
2. Name or initials of service person
3. Brief description of incident symptoms and repairs performed
4. Replacement part or assembly number
5. Software compatibility code of original part
6. Software code of replacement part
7. Serial number of original part
8. Serial number of replacement part
9. Issue number of original circuit module
10. Issue number of replacement circuit module
11. Date of completion
7.8 RECOMMENDED SPARE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS

The quantity and variety of spare parts is determined by how much time a transmitter can be permitted to
remain out of service or off line.
Replaceable parts are listed in Section 9 Model Designations and Specifications (Tables 9-7 to 9-13).
Contact the factory if assistance is needed in determining quantity and selection of spare parts.
When ordering a part, provide the following information for the item, module or assembly to be replaced
or spared. This information will help ensure that a repair addresses the observed problem, and that a
compatible part is supplied.
1. Complete part number from Section 9 or from a label on the assembly
2. The single-digit software revision level
3. Model and serial number from the transmitter’s nameplate
4. User purchase order number of original order, available from user records
5. New user purchase order number for the assembly to be replaced or spared
6. Reason for return for repair; include system failure symptoms, station failure symptoms, and error
codes displayed.
7-18 September 2004

Returns should be packaged in original shipping materials if possible. Otherwise, package item for safe
shipment or contact factory for shipping recommendations. Refer to Section 1.4 Product Support to obtain
a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number.
Important
The electronics module and display must be placed in static shielding bags to
protect them from electrostatic discharge.
7.9 COMPATIBILITY, REVISION NUMBERS

From the HART Communicator, the transmitter can be asked to display four revision numbers.
• Universal Revision - This revision of the universal device description software enables
communication between the transmitter and an external device, such as a HART Communicator.
• Field Device Revision - This Device Description is needed for detailed communication between the
transmitter and other HART devices.
• Software (i.e. firmware) Revision - Since software controls the transmitter’s operating routines and its
HART communications with loop-connected stations and gateways. When requesting technical
information or during troubleshooting, it often is necessary to know the transmitter’s software
revision level. A single digit identifies the transmitter software revision level.
• Hardware Revision - This is the revision number of the transmitter’s hardware.
To view the revision numbers:

1. Establish communication with the transmitter (see Section 3.2).
4. In the Detailed Setup menu, press 4 Device Information.
5. In the Device Information menu, press 6 Revision Numbers.
6. Read and note the revision number of interest.

September 2004 7-19

7-20 September 2004

UMSITRAPDS3-1 Circuit Description
8.0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

This section provides a basic circuit description of the SITRANS P DSIII Pressure Transmitter. Figure 8-
1 shows the functional block diagram. Basically the transmitter consists of two active components: a
measuring cell and an electronics module. Input pressure is piped to the measuring cell (1) that includes
diaphragms, fill fluid, and related components. The output signal from the measuring cell goes to the
electronics module that consists of the microcontroller (4), A/D (3) and D/A (5) converters, HART
modem (7), and related components. The magnetic pushbuttons (8) and display (9) connect to the
electronics module.
The transmitter family consists of four model types: flow, differential pressure, absolute pressure, and
flange-mounted liquid level. All models use the same interchangeable electronics module, display,
enclosure, and magnetic pushbuttons. The major difference between models is the measuring cell.
The transmitters can communicate with a Model 275 HART Communicator, Model 375 Field
Communicator, or a Primary Master controller using the HART protocol.
1 Measuring cell sensor 7 HART modem

2 Instrument amplifier 8 Magnetic pushbuttons for local operation
3 Analog-digital converter 9 Digital display
4 Microcontroller 10 Connections to external milliammeter
5 Digital-analog converter IA Output current
6 Two non-volatile memories in the measuring UH Power supply
cell and electronics
FIGURE 8-1 Transmitter Block Diagram
September 2004 8-1

Circuit Description UMSITRPDS3-1
8.1 Overall Operation

The measuring cell sensor (1) detects the applied process pressure. The sensor’s analog output signal is
amplified by an instrument amplifier (2) and converted into a digital signal in an analog-digital converter
(3). This data is evaluated by a microcontroller (4) that corrects the signal and temperature characteristics.
Microcontroller output is converted to a 4-20 mA output current by the digital-analog converter (5).
A diode circuit (10) provides reverse polarity protection in the event of reversed loop connections. An
external digital milliammeter can be connected across the diode. The diode and the electronics discussed
in the previous paragraph are housed in an assembly named the electronics module.
Measuring cell-specific data (e.g. measuring range, measuring cell material, oil fill) are stored in a non-
volatile memory (6) located in the measuring cell assembly. Transmitter configuration data (e.g. turn-
down, electric damping) are stored in a second non-volatile memory (6) in the electronics module.
The transmitter can be configured locally using three built-in magnetic pushbuttons (8) or remotely, via
the HART modem (7), using the HART Communicator. The digital display (9) shows input pressure,
output current, error messages, modes of operation, or other data as determined by the configuration and
by user commands via the magnetic pushbuttons or HART Communicator.
In the following sections, individual measuring cell types will be explained.
8.2 Pressure
As shown in Figure 8-2, process pressure pe is applied to the measuring cell (2) through the process
connection (3). This pressure is applied to the seal diaphragm which flexes to transfer the pressure to the
fill fluid (5) which in turn transfers the pressure to the silicon pressure sensor (6).
The silicon pressure sensor consists of four piezo-resistors in a bridge circuit grown on the measuring
diaphragm. The applied pressure causes a change in the bridge resistance that is proportion to the input
pressure.
A transmitter with a measuring span of up to 925 psi will measure the input pressure compared to
atmospheric pressure. A transmitter with a measuring span of 2320 psi compares input pressure to a
vacuum.
1 Reference pressure
2 Measuring cell
3 Process connection
4 Seal diaphragm
5 Filling fluid
6 Silicon pressure sensor
pe Input variable pressure
FIGURE 8-2 Pressure Measuring Cell
8-2 September 2004

8.3 Differential Pressure and Flow

Differential pressure is applied to the silicon pressure sensor (4), a seal diaphragm (7) on either side of the
measuring cell body, and the fill fluid (8). See Figure 8-3. When measuring limits are exceeded, the
overload diaphragm (5) deflects until one of the seal diaphragms (7) comes into contact with the
measuring cell body (4) to protect the silicon pressure sensor (3).
Four piezo-resistors in a bridge circuit are grown on the measuring cell diaphragm. The bridge change
resistance in response to a change in input pressure. The change in resistance causes a bridge output
voltage that is proportional to differential pressure.
1 Input pressure P+
2 Process Flange (qty. 2)
3 O-ring (qty. 2)
4 Measuring cell body
6 Overload diaphragm
7 Seal diaphragm (qty. 2)
8 Fill fluid
9 Input pressure P-
FIGURE 8-3 Differential Pressure and Flow Measuring Cell
8.4 Flanged Level

Input pressure (hydrostatic pressure) acts on the high pressure (+) side of the measuring cell through the
seal diaphragm (10) at the mounting flange, the fluid filled capillary tube (8), the fluid filled cavity in the
process flange, a seal diaphragm, and the fill fluid in the measuring cell body (4). See Figure 8-4. A
differential pressure is applied to the low pressure (-) side of the measuring cell via the seal diaphragm (6)
and fill fluid (7) to the silicon pressure sensor (3).
When measuring limits are exceeded, the overload diaphragm (5) deflects until one of the seal
diaphragms (6) comes into contact with the body of the measuring cell (4) to protect the silicon pressure
sensor (3).
The measuring diaphragm is flexed by the differential pressure. Four piezo-resistors in a bridge circuit are
grown on the measuring diaphragm. Bridge resistance varies with pressure changes causing the bridge
output voltage to vary in proportion to the change in applied differential pressure.
September 2004 8-3

1 Process flange (qty. 2)

2 O-ring (qty. 2)
6 Seal diaphragm at the
measuring cell (qty. 2)
7 Fill fluid
8 Capillary tube with fill
fluid
9 Mounting flange with
capillary tube
mounting flange
FIGURE 8-4 Flanged Level Measuring Cell
8.5 Absolute Pressure (Differential Construction)

Absolute pressure pe is transferred via the seal diaphragm (2) and the fill fluid (7) to the silicon pressure
sensor (5). The pressure difference between the input pressure (pe) and the reference pressure (8) on the
low pressure side of the measuring cell flexes the measuring diaphragm. Four piezo-resistors in a bridge
circuit grown on the measuring diaphragm change their resistances in response to the change in applied
pressure. The change in resistance causes a bridge output voltage change that is proportional to the
absolute pressure.
If measuring limits are exceeded, the overload diaphragm (5) will deflect until the seal diaphragm comes
into contact with the body of the measuring cell (4) protecting the silicon pressure sensor (5) against the
overload.
1 Process flange (qty. 2)

measuring cell (qty. 2)
3 O-ring (qty. 2)
7 Fill fluid
8 Reference pressure
pe Input variable pressure
FIGURE 8-5 Absolute Pressure Measuring Cell, Differential Construction
8.6 Absolute Pressure (Gauge Construction)

Pressure pe is applied via the seal diaphragm (3) and full fluid (4) to the absolute pressure sensor (5). See
Figure 8-6. This flexes the measuring diaphragm on which four piezo-resistors in a bridge circuit have
been grown. Bridge resistance will vary with the applied pressure to generate a bridge output voltage that
is proportional to the input pressure.
8-4 September 2004

1 Measuring cell
2 Pressure connection
3 Seal diaphragm
4 Oil fill
5 Absolute pressure
pe sensor
Input variable pressure
FIGURE 8-6 Absolute Pressure Measuring Cell, Gauge Construction
8.7 Communication Format

The transmitter communicates, via the HART protocol, with a HART Communicator and any HART
capable Primary Master controller connected to the network.
HART communication uses phase-continuous frequency-shift-keying (FSK) at 1200 bits/sec and

frequencies of 1200 Hz (logic 1) and 2200 Hz (logic 0). HART communication is superimposed (AC
coupled) on the analog 4-20 mA signal. Because the digital signaling is high frequency AC, its DC
average is zero and does not interfere with analog signaling.
An active filter connected to the loop input receives HART transmissions. The filter effectively rejects
low frequency analog signaling and other out-of-band interference, preventing a compromise of the
digital reception. The filtered signal is applied to a zero crossing detector, which converts the filtered
information into clean pulses of uniform amplitude before introduction to the Bell 202 modem.
The modem receives and processes (e.g., demodulates) the serial FSK signal and outputs a signal to the
microcontroller where serial to parallel conversion is performed.
In response to the received signal, the microcontroller outputs a signal to the modem where it is
modulated and fed into the feedback circuit of a voltage-to-current converter for transmission over the
loop.

September 2004 8-5

8-6 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Model Designations And Specifications
9.0 MODEL DESIGNATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS

This section contains the model designation tables, a comprehensive accessory list, functional and
performance specifications, and hazardous area classifications for SITRANS P Series DSIII Pressure
Transmitters.
Important
Before installing, calibrating, troubleshooting or servicing a transmitter, review

this section carefully for applicable specifications and hazardous area
classifications.
9.1 MODEL DESIGNATIONS

Tables 9-1 through 9-6 identify each entry on a
transmitter’s rating and approval plates. These plates
carry important transmitter information:
• Model number and serial number (Rating Plate) + +

• Materials of construction (Rating Plate)
1 2
• Span and rated pressure (Rating Plate)
• Certifications (Approval Plate) 3
• User-supplied Tag (Tag Plate)
MG00353a
Service Parts
Tables 9-7 through 9-13 identify service parts. 1. Rating Plate

2. Approval Plate
3. Tag Plate
Important
Before installing, applying or removing power, configuring, or servicing, confirm

transmitter model by referring to the transmitter’s model designation on its rating
plate and in Tables 9-1 through 9-6.
The table below is an overview of measurement categories and available models. For details pertaining to
a model, see its model designation table and its specification table later in this section.
Measurement Models Model Designation Specifications Dimensions

Absolute or Gauge 7MF4033 Table 9-1 Table 9-15 Figure 9-1
Pressure 7MF4233 Table 9-2 Table 9-16 Figure 9-1
Differential Pressure 7MF4433 Table 9-4 Table 9-15 Figure 9-2 or 9-3
Level (Flange) 7MF4633 Table 9-6 Table 9-16 Figure 9-4
September 2004 9-1

Model Designations And Specifications UMSITRPDS3-1
TABLE 9-1 Model 7MF4033, Model Designation

Pressure transmitter, two-wire, series DSIII, 7MF4033- -
Measuring cell filling Measuring cell cleaning
Silicone oil Normal 1
Inert Grease-free 3
Span PN
0.15 To 15 psi 87 psi B
0.60 To 60 psi 145 psi C
2.3 To 230 psi 460 psi D
9.25 To 925 psi 1450 psi E
23 To 2320 psi 3625 psi F
58 To 5800 psi 8700 psi G
Material of wetted parts
Process diaphragm Connection shank
Stainless steel Stainless steel A
Hastelloy Stainless steel B
Hastelloy Hastelloy C
Version for diaphragm remote process Y 0
Process connection
Connection shank G1/2 A 0
Female thread 1/2-14 NPT 1
Oval flange and connection shank, stainless steel, maximum span: 2320 psi:
- Mounting thread 7/16-20 UNF 2
- Mounting thread M10 3
Material of non-wetted parts
Housing diecast aluminum 0
Housing stainless steel precision casting 3
Version
Standard version 1
International version (in preparation)
English plate description and documentation in 5 languages on CD 2
Explosion protection
without explosion protection A
with explosion protection (CENELEC):
3)
- Degree of protection "Intrinsic safety" (EEx ia) B
1) 3)
- Degree of protection "Explosion proof" (EEx d) D
1) 3)
- Degree of protection "Intrinsic safety and explosion proof" (EEx ia + EEx d) P
3)
Application in Zone 2 n (TÜV) E
1)
with explosion protection (FM intrinsic safety and explosion proof) H C
1)
with explosion protection (CSA intrinsic safety and explosion proof) L C
with explosion protection (FM + CSA for IS + XP) N
Electrical connection / cable inlet
2) 3)
Screwed gland PG 13.5 (Adapter) A
Female thread M 20 x 1.5 B
Female thread 1/2-14 NPT C
2) 3)
Han 7D plug D
Housing cover / display
without window (digital display covered, setting: mA) 1
with window (digital display, visible, setting: mA) 6
with window (digital display visible, setting: as specified in Y20 7
Notes and “Other versions” on next page.
9-2 September 2004

Other versions
Add "-Z" to order number and add short spec… 7MF4033 - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
Transmitter with mounting bracket of:
- steel A01
- stainless steel A02
3)
Han 7D plug (metal, gray) A30
3)
Han 8U plug (instead of Han 7D) A31
Labeling of rating plate (instead of German):
- English B11
- French B12
- Spanish B13
- Italian B14
Manufacturer test certificate M acc. to DIN 55 350, part 18, and
according to ISO 8402 C11
Acceptance test certificate B acc. to DIN 50 049 / EN 10 204-3.1 B C12
Works certificate according to DIN 50 049-2.2 / EN 10 204-2.2 C14
Setting upper output signal limit to 22.0 mA D05
Acid gas version according to NACE; only with Hastelloy
process diaphragm D07
IP 68 (not with Han 7D/Han 8U plug, cable screwed gland Pg13.5 and
measuring cells < 914 psi) D12
3)
Application in zone 0 (basic device EEx ia) E02
Oxygen application (in oxygen measurement and
Inert filling liquid: 2325 psi maximum) E10
Range to be set, specify in clear text:
Y01: ... to ... mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, ... (27 characters maximum) Y01
Tag number / description
(16 characters maximum) specify in clear text: Y15
Tag message (27 characters maximum) specify in clear text: Y16
Setting digital display, specify in clear text: mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, ... Y20
Factory pre-settings other than "Y01", "Y20" and "D05" are not possible.
Notes:
1) 3)
Without cable screwed gland Not FM approved
2)
Not for "explosion proof" protection
Scope of delivery:
Transmitter as ordered, 1 brief instruction (Leporello)
Ordering example:
Position line: 7MF4033-1EA00-1AA6-Z
B-line: A01+Y01+Y20
C-line: Y01: 145 to 290 psi
C-line: Y20+D100+D36: psi
September 2004 9-3


Absolute pressure, gauge construction, two-wire, series DSIII, 7MF4233- -
Inert Grease-free 3
Span PN
3.3 inH2Oa To 100 inH2Oa 87 psi D
20 inH2Oa To 525 inH2Oa 145 psi F
2.3 psia To 72 psia 435 psi G
14.4 psia To 435 psia 1450 psi H
Material of the wetted parts)
Process diaphragm Parts of measuring cell
Stainless steel Hastelloy B
1)
Version for diaphragm remote seal Y 0
Process connection
Connection shank G 1/2 A 0
Female thread ½-14 NPT 1
Oval flange and connection shank stainless steel
Oval flange and connection shank stainless steel
Material of the non-wetted parts
Housing diecast aluminum 0
Housing stainless steel precision casting 3
Version
Standard version 1
International version (in preparation) plate label in English and
documentation in 5 languages on CD 2
4)
1) 4)
1) 4)
4)
Application in zone 2 n (TÜV) E
1)
1)
3) 4)
Screwed gland Pg 13.5 (Adapter) A
Female thread ½-14 NPT C
3) 4)
Han 7D plug D
with window (digital display visible, setting: mA) 6
with window (digital display visible, setting: as specified in Y20) 7
9-4 September 2004

Other versions
Add "-Z" to order number and add short spec. 7MF4233 - . . . . . - . . . . - Z

- steel A01
4)
4)
Labeling of the rating plate (instead of German):
- English B11
- French B12
- Spanish B13
- Italian B14
Manufacturer test certificate M according to DIN 55 350, Part 18, and
according to ISO 8402: C11
Acceptance test certificate B according to DIN 50 049 / EN 10 204-3.1 B C12
Setting of upper output signal limit to 22.0 mA D05
Acid gas version according to NACE
Only with Hastelloy process diaphragm D07
IP 68 (not with Han 7D/Han 8U plug or cable screwed gland Pg 13.5) D12
4)
Oxygen application (for oxygen measurement and
inert filling liquid: 2325 psi maximum E10
Measuring range to be set, specify in clear text:
Y01: 0 to ... mbar, psi, kPa, Mpa, ... (27 characters maximum) Y01
Tag number / description
(16 characters maximum) specify in clear text: Y15
Notes:
1) 3)
Version 7MF4333-1DY - Only up to a maximum span of 80 inH2O Not for "explosion proof" degree of protection
2) 4)
Without cable screwed gland Not FM approved
September 2004 9-5


Absolute pressure, differential pressure construction, two-wire, series DSIII, 7MF4333- -
Inert Grease-free 3
Span PN
77 psia To 2320 psia 3625 psi K E
Material of the wetted parts (stainless steel process flanges)
Process diaphragm Parts of the measuring cell
Tantalum Tantalum E
Monel Monel H
1)
Gold Gold L
2)
Version for diaphragm remote seal Y
Process connection
Female thread 1/4-18 NPT with flange connection
DIN 19213 with venting opposite process connection
7)
- Mounting thread M 10 0
7/16-20 UNF 2
3)
Venting on side of process flange
7/16-20 UNF 6
Process flange screws Electronics housing
Steel Diecast aluminum 0
Stainless steel Diecast aluminum 2
Stainless steel Stainless steel precision casting 3
Version
Standard version 1
International version (in preparation) plate label in English and
documentation in 5 languages on CD 2
6)
4) 6)
3) 4) 6)
6)
3) 4)
3) 4)
with explosion protection (FM +CSA for IS + XP) N
5) 6)
Female thread M 20 x 1,5 B
5) 6)
Han 7D plug D
9-6 September 2004

Other versions
Add "-Z" to order number and add short specification 7MF4333 - . . . . . - . . . . - Z
- steel A01
Process flange O-ring (instead of FPM (Viton)) of:
- PTFE (Teflon) A20
- FEP (with silicone core, foodstuff compatible) A21
- FFPM (Kalrez) A22
- NBR (buna N) A23
6)
6)
Sealing screw (1/4-18 NPT) with valve in same material as process flange A40
- English B11
- French B12
- Spanish B13
- Italian B14
Manufacturer test certificate M acc. to DIN 55 350, Part 18, and per ISO 8402 C11
Works certificate acc. to DIN 50 049-2.2 / EN 10 204-2.2 C14
Setting of the upper output signal limit to 22.0 mA D05
Acid gas version according to NACE: Only with Hastelloy process diaphragm and
D07
stainless steel process flange screws
IP 68 (not with Han 7D/Han 8U plug or cable screwed gland Pg 13.5) D12
4) 6)
4)
Side vent for gas measurement H02
Process flange:
- without process flange K00
7)
- Hastelloy flange K01
7)
- Monel flange K02
Measuring range to be set, specify in clear text:
Y01: 0 to ... mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, ... (27 characters maximum) Y01
Tag number / description (16 characters maximum), specify in clear text: Y15
Setting digital display, specify in clear text
Analog display, specify in clear text: mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, ... Y20
Notes:
1) 5)
Only with stainless steel process flange screws Not with explosion proof degree of protection
2) 6)
Version 7MF4333-1DY - Only up to a maximum span of 2.9 psi Not FM approved
3) 7)
Not for span G, H, or K Maximum PN 2320 psi static
4)
Without cable screwed gland
September 2004 9-7


Differential pressure and flow transmitters, two-wire, series DSIII, PN 470/2325, 7MF4433- -
Inert Grease-free 3
1)
PN 460 psi, static Span 0.4 To 8 inH2O B
PN 2320 psi, static Span 0.4 To 24 inH2O C
1 To 100 inH2O D
2.4 To 240 inH2O E
6.4 To 640 inH2O F
20 To 2000 inH2O G
4.3 To 435 psi H
Process diaphragm Parts of the measuring cell
2)
Tantalum Tantalum E
2)
Monel Monel H
2), 3)
Gold Gold L
Version for diaphragm remote seal Y
Process connection
Female thread 1/4-18 NPT and flange connection acc. to DIN 19 213
Venting opposite process connection:
Venting on side of process flanges:
7)
7)
Stainless steel Stainless steel precision casting 3
Version
Standard version 1
International version (in preparation) plate label in English and documentation in 5 languages on CD 2
6)
1) 6)
1) 6)
6)
1)
1)
5) 6)
5) 6)
Han 7D plug D
with window: digital display visible, setting: as specified in Y20 7
9-8 September 2004

Other versions
Add "-Z" to order number and add short spec. 7MF4433 - . . . . . - . . . . – Z
- steel A01
- PTFE (Teflon) A20
- FFPM (Kalrez) A22
- NBR (buna N) A23
Han 7D plug 6) A30
Han 8U plug (instead of Han 7D) 6) A31
Sealing screws (1/4-18 NPT) with valve in same material as process flanges A40
- English B11
- French B12
- Spanish B13
- Italian B14
Manufacturer test certificate M acc. To DIN 55350, Part 18, and acc. to ISO 8402 C11
Works certificate acc. To DIN 50 049-2.2 / EN 10 204-2.2 C14
Setting the upper output current limit to 22.0 mA D05
Acid gas version acc. To NACE only with Hastelloy process diaphragm and
stainless steel process flange screws D07
IP 68 (not with Han 7D/Han 8U plug and cable screwed gland Pg 13.5) D12
Application in zone 0 (basic device EEx ia) 6) E02
Overfill protection for combustible and non-combustible liquids
(PN 470 psi maximum) (basic device EEx ia) E08
Oxygen application (for oxygen measurement and inert liquid: 2325 psi maximum) E10
Switching the process connection side (HP side: left, LP side: right) H01
Lateral vent for gas measurement H02
Stainless steel process flanges for vertical active pressure lines (not with supplements K01 or
H03
K02)
Process flanges:
- without process flanges K00
- Hastelloy flanges K01
- Monel flanges K02
Measuring range to be set, specify in clear text,
For linear characteristic: ... to ... mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, ... (27 characters maximum) Y01
For square root characteristic: 0 to ... mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, ... (27 characters maximum) Y02
Tag number / description (16 characters maximum) specify in clear text: Y15
Setting digital display specify in clear text: mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, … Y20
Factory presettings other than "Y01" or "Y02", "Y20" and "D05" are not possible.
Notes:
1) 5)
Not suitable for remote process mounting Not for “explosion proof” degree of protection
2) 6)
Only with span D, F, G, or H Not FM approved
3) 7)
For stainless steel process flange screws Not with K01 or K02
4)
Without cable screwed gland Ordering example:
Scope of delivery: Position line: 7MF9933-1DA00-1AA1-Z
Transmitter as ordered, 1 brief instruction (Leporello) B-line: A01+B11+C14+Y01+Y15
2 sealing screws (same material as process flange) C-line: Y01: 50…150 inH2O
C-line: Y15: PIC 1758
September 2004 9-9


Differential pressure and flow transmitter, two-wire, series DSIII, Model 7MF4533- 1 -
PN 6090 psi Span
1.0 To 100 InH2O D
2.4 To 240 InH2O E
6.4 To 640 InH2O F
20 To 2000 InH2O G
4.3 To 435 psi H
Process diaphragm Parts of the meas. cell
Gold 1) Gold L
Process connection
Female thread 1/4-18 NPT and flange connection, DIN 19 213,
Venting opposite process connection:
Stainless steel (≤ PN 4569 psi) Diecast aluminum 2
Stainless steel (≤ PN 4569 psi) Stainless steel precision casting 3
Version
Standard version 1
International version (in preparation) plate label in English and documentation in 5 languages on 2
CD
with explosion protection (CENELEC)
Degree of protection "Intrinsic safety" (EEx ia) 4) B
Degree of protection "Explosion proof" (EEx d) 2) 4) D
Degree of protection "Intrinsic safety and explosion proof" (EEx ia + EEx d) 2) 4) P
Application in zone 2 n (TÜV) 4) E
with explosion protection (FM intrinsic safety and explosion proof) 2) H C
with explosion protection (CSA intrinsic safety and explosion proof) 2) L C
Screwed gland PG 13.5 3) 4) (Adapter) A
Han 7D plug 3) 4) D
Housing cover / Display
Notes on next page; “Other versions” below and continued on next page.
Other versions
Add "-Z" to order number and add short spec. 7MF4533 - . . . . . - . . . . -Z
- steel A01
9-10 September 2004
Other versions
- PTFE (Teflon) A20
- FFPM (Kalrez) A22
- NBR (buna N) A23
4)
Sealing screw (1/4-18 NPT) with valve in the same material as
the process flanges A40
Labeling of the rating plate (instead of German):
- English B11
- French B12
- Spanish B13
- Italian B14
Manufacturer test certificate M according to DIN 55350, Part 18,
and according to ISO 8402 C11
Acceptance test certificate B according to DIN 50 049 / EN 10 204-3.1 B C12
Setting the upper output signal limit to 22.0 mA D05
Acid gas version according to NACE, only with Hastelloy process
diaphragm and stainless steel process flanges, PN 4569 psi maximum D07
Stainless steel process flange screws, PN 6090 psi, basic device with
machined stainless steel process flange screws D09
Switching the process connection side H01
Lateral vent for gas measurement H02
Stainless steel process flanges for vertical active pressure lines H03
Measuring range to be set, specify in clear text,
For linear characteristic: ... to ... mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, ... (27 characters
Y01
maximum)
For square root characteristic: 0 to ... mbar, psi, kPa, MPa, ..(27 characters
maximum) Y02
Tag number / description (16 characters maximum) specify in clear text: Y15
Factory pre-settings other than "Y01" or "Y02", "Y20" or "D05" are not possible.
Notes:
1)
Only with span D, F, G, or H; maximum PN 4569 psi and only with stainless steel process flange screws
2)
3)
Not with "explosion proof" degree of protection
4)
Not FM approved
Scope of delivery: Transmitter as ordered, 1 brief instruction (Leporello)
2 sealing screws (same material as process flanges)
Ordering example:
Position line: 7MF4533-1DA10-1AA1-Z
B-line: Y01
C-line: Y01: 36.1… 57.4 inH2O
September 2004 9-11

TABLE 9-6 Models 7MF4633 and 7MF4912, Model Designation

Flanged level transmitter, two-wire, series DSIII, 7MF4633- 1 Y -
Span
10.0 To 100 inH2O D
10.0 To 240 inH2O E
20 To 640 inH2O F
64 To 2000 inH2O G
Process connection of low pressure side
Female thread 1/4-18 NPT and flange connection
DIN 19 213 with mounting thread:
- M 10 0
- 7/16-20 UNF 2
Stainless steel Fine precision stainless steel 3
Version
Standard version 1
International version (in preparation) plate label in English and documentation in 5
2
languages on CD
- Degree of protection "Intrinsic safety" (EEx ia) 3) B
- Degree of protection "Explosion proof" (EEx d) 1) 3) D
- Degree of protection "Intrinsic safety and explosion proof" (EEx ia + EEx d) 1) 3) P
Application in zone 2 n (TÜV) 3) E
with explosion protection (FM intrinsic safety and explosion proof) 1) H C
with explosion protection (CSA intrinsic safety and explosion proof) 1) L C
Electrical connection / Cable inlet
Screwed gland PG 13.5 2) 3) (Adapter) A
Female thread M 20 x 1,5 B
Han 7D plug 2) 3) D
Housing cover / Display
with window (digital display, setting: mA) 6
with window (digital display visible, setting: as specified in Y20 7
Notes, “Other versions,” and Model 7MF4912 on next two pages.
9-12 September 2004

Other versions
Add "-Z" to order number and add short spec. 7MF4633 - . . . . . - . . . . -Z
Han 7D plug (metal, gray) 3) A30
Sealing screw (1/4-18 NPT) with valve
in same material as process flanges A40
- English B11
- French B12
- Spanish B13
- Italian B14
Manufacturer test certificate M acc. To DIN 55350, Part 18, and
ISO 8402 C11
Works certificate acc. to DIN 50 049-2.2 / EN 10 204-2.2 C14
Setting the upper limit of the output signal to 22.0 mA D05
Overfill protection for combustible and non-combustible liquids
(maximum PN 32 psi) (basic device EEx ia) E08
Switching the process connection side
(HP side: left, LP side: right) H01
Specify meas. range to be set in clear text,
Y01: ... to ... mbar, bar, kPa, Mpa, ... (27 characters maximum) Y01
Specify tag number / description
(16 characters maximum) in clear text: Y15
Specify tag message (27 characters maximum) in clear text: Y16
Specify setting digital display in clear text: mbar, bar, kPa, MPa, ... Y20
Factory presettings other than "Y01", "Y20" and "D05" are not possible.
Notes:
1)
2)
Not with "explosion proof” degree of protection
3)
Not FM approved
Scope of delivery:
Transmitter as ordered, 1 brief instruction (Leporello)
1 sealing screw (same material as process flange)
Order example:
Pos. 1 Position line: 7MF4633-1DY10-1AA1-Z
B-line: Y01
C-line: Y01: 1.3 to 2.1 inH2O
Pos. 2 Position line: 7MF4912-3DA11
September 2004 9-13

Flanged Level Transmitter Accessories Order number

Mounting flange, mounted directly on transmitter, two-wire, 7MF4912- 3
Flange Nominal diameter Nominal pressure
Connection per DN 80 PN 40 psi D
DIN 2501 DN 100 PN 16 psi G
PN 40 psi H
Connection per 3 inch 150 lb/sq. in. Q
ANSI B 16.5 300 lb/sq. in. R
4 inch 150 lb/sq. in. T
300 lb/sq. in. U
Special version according to customer specifications Z J1Y
Material of wetted parts
Stainless steel M.-No. 1.4571:
Without foil, uncoated A
1)
With PTFE foil E
1)
With ECTFE coating F
1)
With PFA coating D
Monel 400, W.-No. 2.4360 G
Hastelloy B2, W.-No. 2.4617 H
Hastelloy C276, W.-No. 2.4819 J
Tantalum K
Hastelloy C4, W.-No. 2.4610 U
Special version to customer specifications Z K1Y
Smooth processing face according to DIN 2526, Form D:
2)
Tube length Flush mount 0
2” / 50 mm 1
4” / 100 mm 2
6” / 150 mm 3
8” / 200 mm 4
Filling liquid
Silicone oil M5 1
Special version to customer specifications 9 M1Y
Other versions for mounting flange

Add "-Z" to the order number and add short spec. 7MF4912 - . . . . . -Z
With flame barrier for mounting in zone 0 (with documentation) A01
Manufacturer test certificate M acc. to DIN 55 350, Part 18, and ISO 8402 (not with supplement "P01") C11
Acceptance test certificate B according to DIN 50 049; see Section 3.1 and EN 10 204 C12
Vacuum-proof version (use in vacuum pressure range) V04
Calculation of span of the corresponding transmitter, enclose completed questionnaire! (Not with supplement
Y05
“P01.”)
Notes:
1)
For vacuum on request
2)
Prices for the stated tube lengths are based on the material of the wetted part: stainless steel M. No. 1.4571.
Prices for other materials are available upon request.
9-14 September 2004

TABLE 9-7 Measuring Cells for Pressure, Service Parts
DS III and DS III PA series, 7MF4990- 0

Silicon oil Normal 1
Inert Grease-free 3
Nominal measuring range PN
0.15 To 15 psi 87 psi B
0.60 To 60 psi 145 psi C
2.3 To 230 psi 460 psi D
9.25 To 925 psi 1450 psi E
23 To 2320 psi 3625 psi F
58 To 5800 psi 8700 psi G
Wetted parts materials
Seal diaphragm Connection shank
Process connection
Oval flange and stainless steel connection shank, maximum span: 2320 psi
TABLE 9-8 Measuring Cells for Absolute Pressure, Gauge Construction, Service Parts
DS III and DS III PA series, Gauge Construction, 7MF4992- 0

Inert Grease-free 3
Seal diaphragm Connection shank
Process connection
Oval flange and stainless steel connection shank, maximum 2320 psia
September 2004 9-15

TABLE 9-9 Measuring Cells for Absolute Pressure, Differential Const., Service Parts
DS III and DS III PA series, Differential Construction, 7MF4993-

Inert Grease-free 3
77 psia To 2320 psia 3625 psi K E
Wetted parts materials (stainless steel process flanges)
Seal diaphragm Parts of measuring cell
Tantalum Tantalum E
Monel Monel H
1)
Gold Gold L
Process connection
Female thread 1/4-18 NPT with flange connection to DIN 19213 with:
Sealing screw opposite process connection
2)
3)
Sealing screw on side of process flange
Non-wetted parts materials
Process flange screws
Steel 0
Stainless steel 2
1)
Only with stainless steel process flange screws
2)
Maximum PN 2320 psi static
3)
Not for spans G, H, or K
Other versions
Add "Z" to the order number and the specify order code 7MF4993-............- Z
Process flange O-ring (instead of FPM (Viton)) made of:
- PTFE (Teflon) A20
- FEP (with silicone core, approved for foodstuffs A21
- FFPM (Kalrez) A22
- NBR (Buna N) A23
Remote seals; not with K01, K02 or K04 D20
Vent on side for gas measurements H02
Without process flange K00
Process flange made of:
- Hastelloy K01
- Monel K02
- Stainless steel with PVDF insert K04
9-16 September 2004

TABLE 9-10 Measuring Cells for Pressure and Flow, Differential Const., Service Parts
DS III and DS III PA series, differential construction, 7MF4994-

Inert Grease-free 3
Nominal measuring range
1)
PN 460 psi, static span 0.4 To 8 inH2O B
PN 2320 psi, static span 0.4 To 24 inH2O C
1 To 100 inH2O D
2.4 To 240 inH2O E
6.4 To 640 inH2O F
20 To 2000 inH2O G
4.3 To 435 psi H
2)
Tantalum Tantalum E
2)
Monel Monel H
2) 3)
Gold Gold L
Process connection
Sealing screw on side of process flange
4)
4)
Steel 0
Stainless steel 2
1)
Not for remote seal connection
2)
Only with span D, F, G, or H
3)
Only with stainless steel process flange screws
4)
Not with K01 or K02
Other versions
- PTFE (Teflon) A20
- FFPM (Kalrez) A22
- NBR (Buna N) A23
Remote seals; not with K01, K02 or K04 D20
Process flanges of stainless steel for vertical differential lines; not with K01, K02 or K04 H03
Process flanges:
- without process flanges K00
- Hastelloy flanges K01
- Monel flanges K02
- Stainless steel, with PVDF insert, flanges K04
September 2004 9-17

TABLE 9-11 Measuring Cells for Differential Pressure and Flow, Service Parts
DS III and DS III PA series, differential construction, 7MF4995 1

1.0 To 100 inH2O 6090 psi D
2.4 To 240 inH2O 6090 psi E
6.4 To 640 inH2O 6090 psi F
20 To 2000 inH2O 6090 psi G
4.3 To 435 psi 6090 psi H
1)
Gold Gold L
Process connection

Steel 0
Stainless steel (<PN 4569 psi) 2
1)
Only with span D, F, G, or H. Maximum PN 4569 psi only with stainless steel process
flange screws
Other versions
- PTFE (Teflon) A20
- FFPM (Kalrez) A22
- NBR (Buna N) A23
Process flange screws machined from stainless steel for PN 6090 psi D09
Process flanges of stainless steel for vertical differential lines H03
Without process flange K00
9-18 September 2004

TABLE 9-12 Measuring Cells for Filling Level, Service Parts
DS III and DS III PA series, 7MF4996 1

Nominal measuring range
10.0 To 100 inH2O D
10.0 To 240 inH2O E
20 To 640 inH2O F
64 To 2000 inH2O G
Process connection, minus side
Steel 0
Stainless steel 2
Other versions
Add "Z" to order number and specify order code 7MF4996-............- Z

- PTFE (Teflon) A20
- FFPM (Kalrez) A22
- NBR (Buna N) A23
TABLE 9-13 Electronics and Connecting Boards, Service Parts
Product description Order Number

SITRANS P DS III electronics module 7MF4997-1DK
SITRANS P DS III terminal board (for field terminal connections) 7MF4997-1DN
SITRANS P DS III digital display 7MF4997-1BQ
September 2004 9-19

9.2 ACCESSORIES
The following table lists many of the available accessories. Additional information about many
transmitter accessories can be found in PI34-3, XTC Transmitter Accessory Guide.
TABLE 9-14 Accessories
DESCRIPTION MODEL 7MF PART NUMBER

4433, 4033, 7633,
4533 4233, 4912
4333
Three-Valve Manifold, Steel* Y N N 16275-252
Three-Valve Manifold, 316 SS* Y N N 16275-251
Transient Suppressor* Y Y Y 14999-287
General Purpose Power Supply, 24 Vdc, 2A* Y Y Y 15124-1
Field Mounted Power Supply, 28 Vdc, 125 mA* Y Y Y 16055-299
Model 275 Universal HART Communicator Y Y Y 275D9EI5B0100
Model 375 Field Communicator Y Y Y 375HR1EKLU
*Refer to GCMC-1, Measurement & Control Product Catalog, for additional details.
Y = For use with transmitter model in table column head; N = not for use.
9-20 September 2004

9.3 SPECIFICATIONS
The following specifications are for all transmitter models except as noted. Table 9-15 is for Pressure and
Differential Pressure models. Table 9-16 is for Absolute Pressure and Filling Level models.
TABLE 9-15 Specifications, Pressure and Differential Pressure Models

Device type: Pressure Differential pressure
7MF4033 7MF4433 / 7MF4533
Application range See Table 9-17 See Table 9-18
Function
Measurement principle Piezoresistive
Input
Measurement variable Pressure Differential pressure and flow
Measurement range
● Span (continuously adjustable) 0.15 to 5800 psi (6 ranges)
Nominal pressure (PN) 470 psi 0.4 to 8 inH2O (1 range)
Nominal pressure (PN) 2325 psi 0.4 inH2O to 435 psi (6 ranges)
Nominal pressure (PN) 6090 psi 1 inH2O to 435 psi (5 ranges)
● Lower measurement limit -100% of maximum span
- 435 psi measuring cell -33 % of maximum span
- Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 12 inH2O (absolute) 12 inH2O (absolute)
- Measuring cell with inert filling liquid
for process temp. -20 °C < ϑ < 60 °C 12 inH2O (absolute)
for process temp. +60 °C < ϑ < 100 °C 12 inH2O (abs) + 8 inH2O (abs) · ((ϑ - 60 °C) / °C)
(maximum +85°C for 435 psi meas. cell)
+100 % of maximum span, (maximum 2325 psi in oxygen measurement and

● Upper measurement limit
inert filling liquid 2325 psi)
● Start of scale (continuously adjustable) Between the measuring limits

Output
Output signal 4 to 20 mA
● Lower limit (continuously adjustable) 3.55 mA, factory set to 3.84 mA
● Upper limit (continuously adjustable) 23.0 mA, factory set 20.5 mA or optionally 22.0 mA
● Ripple (without HART communication) Ipp ≤ 0.5% of maximum output current
● Electric damping
- adjustable time constants (T 66) 0 to 100 s, in steps of 0.1 s, factory set to 0.1 s
● Current transmitter Adjustable 3.55 to 23 mA
● Failure signal Adjustable 3.55 to 23 mA
Load
● without HART communication RB ≤ (UH - 10.5 V) / 0.023 A in Ω, UH: power supply in V
RB = 230 to 500Ω (HART-Communicator) or RB = 1100Ω (HART-

● with HART communication
Communicator)
Characteristic Linear forward or reverse acting

or square root forward
Measuring accuracy
Forward acting, zero based, process diaphragm stainless steel; for flange
Reference conditions
level flush mount, silicone oil filling and room temperature 25 °C
r = maximum span / set span = span ratio
September 2004 9-21


7MF4033 7MF4433 / 7MF4533
Measurement error (limit point setting, including
hysteresis and repetitive accuracy)
● linear characteristic
r ≤ 10 ≤ 0.1 %
10 < r ≤ 30 ≤ 0.2 %
30 < r ≤100 ≤ (0.005 · r + 0.05) %
● Square root characteristic
Flow > 50% ≤ 0.1 % at r ≤ 10
≤ 0.2 % at 10 < r ≤ 30
Flow 25 to 50% ≤ 0.2 % at r ≤ 10
≤ 0.4 % at 10 < r ≤ 30
● Repetitive accuracy Contained in measuring error
● Hysteresis Contained in measuring error
About 0.2 s, about 0.3 s with
Transient time (T63, without electrical damping) About 0.2 s
8 and 24 inH2O meas. cell
Long-term drift over 12 months ≤ ( 0.1 · r) %
8 inH2O meas. cell: ≤ ( 0.2 · r) %
Influence of ambient temperature
1)
● at -10 to +60 °C ≤ (0.1 · r + 0.2) %
1)
double value with 8 inH2O
measuring cell
1)
● at -40 to -10 °C and +60 to +85 °C ≤ (0.1 · r + 0.15) % / 10 K
1)
double value with 8 inH2O
measuring cell
Influence of static pressure
● on zero ≤ (0.15 · r) % per 1450 psi
8 inH2O meas. cell ≤ (0.15 · r) % per 464 psi
● on the span ≤ 0.2% per 1450 psi
8 inH2O meas. cell ≤ 0.2% per 464 psi
Influence of installation position ≤ 0.2 inH2O per 10° angle ≤ 0.28 inH2O per 10° angle
Influence of power supply 0.005 % per 1V change in voltage
Operating conditions
Installation conditions
Process connection vertically
● Installation note Any
downwards
Ambient conditions
● Ambient temperature (in hazardous
zones note temperature class) measuring cell
- Measuring cell with silicon oil fill. -40 to +85 °C (-40 to +185°F)
Span 435 psi at PN 6174 psi -20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185°F)
- Meas. cell with inert filling liquid -20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185°F)
- Digital display -50 to +85 °C(-58 to +185°F)
● Ambient temperature limit see ambient temperature
● Storage temperature -30 to +85 °C (-22 to +185°F)
● Climate class
- Condensation Permissible
● Degree of protection (EN 60 529) IP 65
● EMC
- Spurious emission EN 50 081-1
- Interference resistance EN 50 082-2 and NAMUR NE 21
9-22 September 2004


7MF4033 7MF4433 / 7MF4533
Process conditions
● Process temperature
- Measuring cell with silicon oil fill. -40 to +100 °C (-40 to +212°F)
Span 435 psi at PN 6174 psi
-20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185°F)
- Measuring cell with inert filling liquid -20 to +100 °C (-4 to +212°F)
Span 435 psi -20 to +85°C (-4 to +185°F)
● Process temperature limit see process temperature
● Process pressure limit see Table 9-10 Nominal pressure (PN); see Table 9-11
Constructional design
Weight (without options) About 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg) About 8.8 lbs (4 kg)
Transmitter with mounting flange without tube
Dimensions see Figure 9-1 see Figures 9-2 and 9-3

Material
● Material of wetted parts
- Connection shank Stainless steel, M.-No. 1.4401 or
Hastelloy C4, M.- No. 2.4610
- Oval flange Stainless steel, M.-No. 1.4401
- Process diaphragm Stainless steel, M.-No. 1.4404 or Hastelloy C276, M.- No. 2.4819
Monel, M.-No. 2.4360
Tantalum or gold
- Process flanges and sealing screw Stainless steel, W.-No. 1.4408,
Hastelloy C4, W.-No. 2.4610 or
Monel, W.-No. 2.4360
- O-ring FPM (Viton) or optionally:
PTFE, FEP, FFPM and NBR
● Material of non-wetted parts
Low copper diecast aluminum GD-ALSi 12, polyester-based varnish or

- Electronics housing
stainless steel precision casting, stainless steel rating plate
- Process flange screws Steel, galvanized, yellow-

chromed or stainless steel
- Mounting bracket (optional) Steel, galvanized and yellow-chromed or stainless steel
Silicone oil filling or inert liquid (maximum pressure 2325 psi for oxygen
Meas. cell filling
measurement)
Process connection Connection shank G½A Female thread 1/4 - 18 NPT and
DIN 16 288, female thread Flange connection DIN
½ -14NPT or oval flange 19213 with mounting thread
maximum range 2325 psi
with mounting thread M10 / M10 (PN 2325 psi)
M12 or 7/16 –20 UNF M12 or 7/16 -20 UNF
Screw terminals, cable inlet or screwed gland Pg 13.5 (adapter), M20 x 1.5
Electrical connection
or ½ - 14 NPT, or Han 7D/Han 8U plug
Display and user interface

Input keys 3 pushbuttons on the device for local programming
Digital display Installed, cover with window (optional)
Power supply (UH)
Terminal voltage at the transmitter DC 10.5V to 45V or
September 2004 9-23


7MF4033 7MF4433 / 7MF4533
DC 10.5V to 30 V in intrinsically safe operation
Ripple Upp ≤ 0.2 V (47 to 125 Hz)
Noise Ueff ≤ 1.2 mV (0.5 to 10 kHz)
The specifications in the official EC test certificate and the applicable

Certificates and licenses
supplements are exclusively valid
CENELEC DIN EN 50 014: 1997, EN 50 020: 1994 and EN 50 284: 1999

● Intrinsic safety Ex II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T4 / T5 / T6
- EC test certificate PTB 99 ATEX 2122
+85 °C temperature class T4, +70 °C temperature class T5, +60 °C

- Max. ambient temperature
temperature class T6
- Connection to certified intrinsically safe Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Pi = 750 mW Ri = 300 Ω

circuits with the maximum values
- Active internal inductance Li = 1 mH
- Active internal capacitance Ci = 6 nF
● Explosion proof available
- Certificate of conformity available
- Max. ambient temperature consult factory
● Ex-tested zone 2n consult factory
- Registration number consult factory
FMRC (Factory Mutual Research Corp.)
● Intrinsic safety and explosion proof 3008490 (3610, 3615)
● Explosion proof For class I, division 1, groups A, B, C, and D
For class II, division 1, groups E, F, and G, indoor and outdoor (NEMA 4X)
● Dust-ignition proof
hazardous (classified) locations
With entity, for use in class I, division 1, groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G,
● Intrinsically safe
indoor and outdoor (NEMA 4X) hazardous (classified) locations
Vmax = 30V; Imax = 100 mA
● Entity parameters
Li = 0.4 mH; Ci = 5 nF
CSA (Certificate of Compliance) 1153651 (No. LR104225), Class 2258 02 and Class 2258 03
Communication
Load when connecting a
● HART Communicators 230 to 1100 Ohm
● HART-Modems 230 to 500 Ohm
2-wire shielded: ≤ 3.0 km (9800 ft); multi-wire shielded: ≤ 1.5 km (4900 ft);
Twinaxial cable
see Section 9.5
Protocol HART, Version 5.x
IBM-compatible, RAM > 32 Mbytes, Hard disk > 70 Mbytes, RS 232

PC/Laptop requirements
interface, VGA graphics
Software for PC/Laptop WINDOWS 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 and SIMATIC PDM
9-24 September 2004

TABLE 9-16 Specifications, Absolute Pressure and Filling Level Models

Device type: Absolute pressure Filling level
Pressure series 7MF4233 Diff. pressure series 7MF4333 7MF4633 / 7MF4912
Application range See Table 9-17 See Table 9-20 See Table 9-21
Function
Measurement principle Piezoresistive
Input
Measurement variable Absolute pressure Filling level
Measurement range
● Span (continuously adjustable) 0.12 to 435 psia (4 ranges) 0.12 to 2325 psia (5 ranges) 2.9 to 72 psia (4 ranges)
Nominal pressure (PN) 470 psi
● Lower measurement limit -100% of max span or
- Measuring cell with silicone oil filling 0 psi (absolute) 0.43 psi (abs) depending
on remote seal
- Measuring cell with inert filling liquid
for process temp. -20 °C < ϑ < 60 °C 0.43 psi (absolute)
for process temp. +60 °C < ϑ < 100 °C 0.43 psi (abs) + 0.29 psi (abs) - ((ϑ - 60 °C) / °C)
(max. +85°C for 485 psi meas. cell)
+100% of maximum span; maximum 2325 psi in oxygen

● Upper measurement limit +100% of max span
measurement and inert filling liquid 2325 psi
● Start of scale (continuously adjustable) Between the measuring limits

Output
Output signal 4 to 20 mA
● Lower limit (continuously adjustable) 3.55 mA, factory set to 3.84 mA
● Upper limit (continuously adjustable) 23.0 mA, factory set to 20.5 mA or optionally 22.0 mA
● Ripple (without HART communication) Ipp ≤ 0.5% of maximum output current
● Electric damping
- adjustable time constants (T 66) 0 to 100 seconds in steps of 0.1 seconds, factory set to 0.1 seconds
● Current transmitter Adjustable 3.55 to 23 mA
● Failure signal Adjustable 3.55 to 23 mA
Load
● without HART communication RB ≤ (UH - 10.5V) / 0.023A in Ω, UH: power supply in V
● with HART communication RB = 230 to 500Ω (HART-Communicator) or RB = 1100Ω (HART-Communicator)
Characteristic Forward acting or reverse acting
Measuring accuracy
Forward acting, zero based, process diaphragm stainless steel; For flange level flush mount,
Reference conditions
silicone oil filling and room temperature 25°C
r = maximum span / set span = span ratio

Measurement error (limit point setting,
including hysteresis and repetitive accuracy)
● linear characteristic
r ≤ 10 ≤ 0.1% ≤ 0.15 %
10 < r ≤ 30 ≤ 0.2 % ≤ 0.3 %
30 < r ≤100 ≤ (0.0075 · r + 0.075)%
● Repetitive accuracy Contained in measuring error
● Hysteresis Contained in measuring error
Transient time (T63, without electrical damping) About 0.2 seconds
Long-term drift over 12 months ≤ (0.2 · r) % ≤ ( 0.1 · r) %
September 2004 9-25


Influence of ambient temperature
1)
● at -10 to +60 °C ≤ (0.1 · r + 0.2) %
2)
100 inH2O measuring cell ≤ (0.5 · r + 0.2 )%
2)
241 inH2O measuring cell ≤ (0.3 · r + 0.2 )%
2)
646 and 2011 inH2O measuring cell ≤ (0.25 · r + 0.2 )%
2)
0.4 inst. of 0.2 at 10 < r ≤ 30
1)
● at -40 to -10 °C and +60 to +85 °C ≤ (0.1 · r + 0.15) % / 10 K
3)
104 inH2O measuring cell ≤ (0.25 · r + 0.15 ) % / 10 K
3)
241 inH2O measuring cell ≤ (0.15 · r + 0.15 ) % / 10 K
3)
646 and 2011 inH2O measuring cell ≤ (0.12 · r + 0.15 ) % / 10 K
3)
0.3 inst. of 0.15 at10 < r ≤ 30
Influence of static pressure

● on start of scale
100 inH2O measuring cell (0.3 · r) % per nom. pressure
241 inH2O measuring cell (0.15 · r) % per nom. pressure
646 and 2011 inH2O measuring cell (0.1 · r) % per nom. pressure
● on the span (0.1 · r) % per nom. pressure
8 inH2O measuring cell
Influence of installation position ≤ 0.02 inH2O per 10° angle ≤ 0.28 inH2O per 10° angle Depends on the filling liquid
in the mounting flange
Influence of power supply 0.005 % per 1 V change in voltage
Operating conditions
Installation conditions
Process connection
● Installation note Any Determined by flange
vertically downwards
Ambient conditions
● Ambient temperature (in hazardous zones,
note temperature class)
Measuring cell
- Measuring cell with silicone oil fill -40 to +85 °C (-40 to +85ºF)
- Measuring cell with inert filling liquid -20 to +85 °C (-4 to +185ºF)
Digital display -50 to +85 °C (-58 to +185ºF)
● Ambient temperature limit see ambient temperature
● Storage temperature -30 to +85 °C (-22 to +185ºF)
● Climate class, condensation Permissible
● Degree of protection (EN 60 529) IP 65
● EMC
- Spurious emission EN 50 081-1
- Interference resistance EN 50 082-2 and NAMUR NE 21
Process conditions
● Process temperature
- Measuring cell with silicone oil fill -40 to +100 °C (-40 to +212ºF)
- Measuring cell with inert filling liquid -20 to +100 °C (-4 to +212ºF)
Span 435 psi at PN 6174 psi -20 to +85°C (-4 to +212ºF)
● Process temperature limit see process temperature
Nominal pressure (PN); see
● Process pressure limit see Table 9-12 see Table 9-13
Table 9-14
Constructional design
Weight (without options) about 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg) about 9.9 lbs (4.5 kg)
Transmitter with mounting flange without tube DIN: about 24.3 to 28.7 lbs (11
t 13 k )
9-26 September 2004

to 13 kg)
ANSI: about 24.3 to 39.7 lbs (11
to 18 kg)
Dimensions see Figure 9-1 see Figure 9-2 see Figure 9-4
Material
● Material of wetted parts
Stainless steel W.-No.
- Connection shank
1.4401 or
Hastelloy C4, W.-No. 2.4610
Stainless steel, W.-No.
- Oval flange
1.4401
- Process diaphragm Stainless steel, W.-No. 1.4404 or Hastelloy C276, W.- No. 2.4819
Tantalum or gold
- Process flanges and sealing screw Stainless Steel, W.-No. 1.4408
Hastelloy C4, W.-No. 2.4610 or
- O-ring FPM (Viton) or optionally:
PTFE, FEP, FFPM and NBR
Process material (O-ring) for mounting flange
in the process flanges
for standard applications FPM (Viton)
for vacuum applications Copper
- High pressure side
Process diaphragm at mtg. Flange Stainless steel, W.-No. 1.4571,
Monel 400 W.-No. 2.4360,
Hastelloy B2 W.-No. 2.4617,
Hastelloy C276, W.-No. 2.4819,
Hastelloy C4, W.-No. 2.4610,
Tantalum, PTFE, ECTFE
Processing face
Smooth DIN 2526, Form D or
ANSI B16.5 RF for stainless
steel M.-No. 1.4571, DIN 2526
Form E or ANSI B16.5 RSFS for
other materials.
- Low pressure side

Process diaphragm Stainless steel W.- No 1.4404
Process flanges and sealing screw Stainless steel W.- No 1.4408
Connection shank Stainless steel W.- No 1.4401
O-ring FPM (Viton)
● Material of non-wetted parts
Low copper diecast aluminum GD-ALSi 12, polyester-based varnish or stainless steel precision
- Electronics housing
casting, stainless steel rating plate
- Process flange screws Steel, galvanized, yellow-chromed or stainless steel

- Mounting bracket (optional) Steel, galvanized and yellow-chromed or stainless steel
Silicone oil filling or inert liquid (maximum pressure 2325 psi

Measuring cell filling Silicone oil
for oxygen measurement)
Filling liquid mounting flange Silicone oil or other version

Process connection Connection shank G½A Female thread 1/4 - 18 NPT and
DIN 16 288, female thread Flange connection DIN
½-14NPT or oval flange 19213 with mounting thread
September 2004 9-27


maximum range 2325 inH20
with mounting thread M10 / M10 or 7/16 - 20 UNF
M12 or 7/16-20 UNF
High pressure side DIN and ANSI flange
Low pressure side Female thread 1/4 - 18 NPT and
Flange connection DIN
19213 with mounting thread
M10 or 7/16 - 20 UNF
Screw terminals, cable inlet or screwed gland Pg 13.5 (adapter), M20 x 1.5 or ½ - 14 NPT, or
Electrical connection
Han 7D/Han 8U plug
Display and user interface

Input keys 3 pushbuttons for local programming at the device
Digital display Installed, cover with window (optional)
Power supply (UH)
Terminal voltage at the transmitter DC 10.5V to 45V or
DC 10.5V to 30V in intrinsically safe operation
Ripple Upp ≤ 0.2V (47 to 125 Hz)
Noise Ueff ≤ 1.2 mV (0.5 to 10 kHz)
The specifications in the official EC test certificate and the applicable supplements are
Certificates and licenses
exclusively valid
CENELEC DIN EN 50 014: 1997, EN 50 020: 1994 and EN 50 284: 1999
● Intrinsic safety Ex II 1/2 G EEx ia IIC T4 / T5 / T6
- EC test certificate TÜV 99 ATEX 1494
- Maximum ambient temperature +85 °C temperature class T4, +70 °C temperature class T5, +60 °C temperature class T6
- Connection to certified intrinsically safe
circuits with the maximum values Ui = 30 V, Ii = 100 mA, Pi = 750 mW Ri = 300Ω
- Active internal inductance Li = 1 mH
- Active internal capacitance Ci = 6 nF
● Explosion proof available
- Certificate of conformity available
- Maximum ambient temperature consult factory
● Ex-tested zone 2n consult factory
- Registration number consult factory
FMRC (Factory Mutual Research Corp.)
● Intrinsic safety and explosion proof 3008490 (3610, 3615)
● Explosion proof For class I, division 1, groups A, B, C, and D
For class II, division 1, groups E, F, and G, indoor and outdoor (NEMA 4X) hazardous
● Dust-ignition proof
(classified) locations
With entity, for use in class I, division 1, groups A, B, C, D, E, F, and G, indoor and outdoor
● Intrinsically safe
(NEMA 4X) hazardous (classified) locations
● Entity parameters Vmax = 30V; Imax = 100 mA; Li = 0.4 mH; Ci = 5 nF
CSA (Certificate of Compliance) 1153651 (LR104225), Class 2258 02 and Class 2258 03
Communication
Load when connecting a:
● HART Communicator 230 to 1100 Ohm
● HART Modem 230 to 500 Ohm
Twinaxial cable 2-wire shielded: ≤ 3.0 km (9800 ft); multi-wire shielded: ≤ 1.5 km (4900 ft); see Section 9.5
Protocol HART, Version 5.x
PC/Laptop requirements IBM-compatible, RAM > 32 Mbytes, Hard disk > 70 Mbytes, RS 232 interface, VGA graphics
Software for PC/Laptop WINDOWS 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 and SIMATIC PDM
9-28 September 2004

9.4 MEASURING SPANS AND OVERLOAD LIMITS

This section provides tables that contain the measuring spans and overload limits for each series DSIII
transmitter.
TABLE 9-17 Pressure Transmitter, 7MF4033
Measuring Span, Continuously Adjustable Process Pressure Limits
Lower Upper
0.15 To 14.5 psi -14.5 psi 87 psi
0.58 To 60 psi -14.5 psi 145 psi
2.3 To 230 psi -14.5 psi 464 psi
9.1 To 925 psi -14.5 psi 1450 psi
23 To 2325 psi -14.5 psi 3625 psi 1)
58 To 5800 psi 1) -14.5 psi 8700 psi 1)
1) For oxygen measurement, maximum is 2325 psi.
TABLE 9-18 Differential Pressure and Flow Transmitters, 7MF4433 & 7MF4533
Measuring Span, Continuously Adjustable Maximum Working Pressure
7MF4433 7MF4533
4)
0.4 To 8 inH2O 470 psi 470 psi 4)
0.4 To 24 inH2O 2300 psi 2300 psi
1 To 100 inH2O 2300 psi 6090 psi
2.4 To 240 inH2O 2300 psi 6090 psi
6.4 To 640 inH2O 2300 psi 6090 psi
4.3 To 435 psi 2300 psi 6090 psi 1), 2), 3)
1) For oxygen measurement, maximum is 2325 psi
2) Silicon measuring cell fill only
3) MWP 4568 psi with stainless steel process flange screw
4) Not suitable for remote process mounting
TABLE 9-19 Absolute Pressure, Gauge Construction, 7MF4233

Measuring Span, Continuously Adjustable Process Pressure Limit
3.3 To 100 inH2O see Note 87 psi
18 To 525 inH2O 145 psi
64 To 2000 inH2O 435 psi
400 To 12,000 inH2O 1450 psi
Note, 100 inH2O Cell
This measuring cell is designed for operation within the measuring limits of 0
inH2O (absolute) to 100 inH2O (absolute). When stored in the normal ambient
pressure of about of about 14.7 psi (absolute), the measuring cell is in the
overload state. An overload error of up to 0.8 inH2O may occur. The overload
disappears in normal operation within the measuring limits and the transmitter
operates within specifications.
When performing accurate continuous pressure measurements within the

measuring limits, a readjustment of the transmitter zero for absolute pressure
must be performed after approximately one day (refer to Section 6.2.5).
September 2004 9-29

If pressure measurements exceed the measuring limits repeatedly (e.g. batch

processes with transitions between vacuum and ventilation), a measuring cell
with a maximum range of 525 inH2O should be selected to avoid overloading.
TABLE 9-20 Absolute Pressure, Differential Construction, 7MF4333

Measuring Span, Continuously Adjustable Process Pressure Limits
3.3 To 100 inH2O see Note 464 psi
18 To 525 inH2O 464 psi
64 To 2000 inH2O 464 psi
400 To 12,000 inH2O 2320 psi
77 To 2325 psi 3625 psi
* 2325 psi at M10 process connection.
Note, 100 inH2O Cell
This measuring cell is designed for operation within the measuring limits of 0
inH2O (absolute) to 100 inH2O (absolute). When stored in the normal ambient
pressure of about of about 14.7 psi (absolute), the measuring cell is in the
overload state. An overload error of up to 0.8 inH2O may occur. The overload
disappears in normal operation within the measuring limits and the transmitter
operates within specifications.
When performing accurate continuous pressure measurements within the

measuring limits, a readjustment of the transmitter zero for absolute pressure
must be performed after approximately one day (refer to Section 6.2.5).
If pressure measurements exceed the measuring limits repeatedly (e.g. batch

processes with transitions between vacuum and ventilation), a measuring cell
with a maximum range of 525 inH2O should be selected to avoid overloading.
TABLE 9-21 Flanged Level, 7MF4633 / 7MF4912

Measuring Span, Continuously Adjustable Maximum Working Pressure
10 To 100 inH2O consult factory
9-30 September 2004

1 Process connection, ½ -14NPT, connection shank 4 Connector side

G1/2A or oval flange 5 Electronics side, digital display (greater length for
2 Blanking plug cover with window)
3 Electrical connection: 6 Access cover over magnetic pushbuttons
Screwed gland Pg 13.5 (adapter) 7 Mounting bracket (optional)
Screwed gland M20 x 1.5 or
Screwed gland ½ -14NPT or This Figure is for Models 7MF4033 and 7MF4233.
Han 7D/Han 8 U-plug
FIGURE 9-1 Dimensions, Gauge Construction, Pressure and Absolute Models
September 2004 9-31

1 Process connection ¼-18NPT for absolute pressure 6 Electronics side, digital display (greater length for
(+) side cover with window)
2 Mounting thread M10, M12 or 7/16-20UNF 7 Access cover over magnetic pushbuttons
3 Dummy plug 8 Sealing screw
4 Electrical connection: 9 Side vent for measuring liquid
Screwed gland PG 13.5 (adapter) 10 Side vent for measuring gas (supplement H02)
M20 x 1.5 or ½ -14NPT or 11 Mounting bracket (optional)
Han 7D/Han 8 U plug
5 Connection side This Figure is for Models 7MF4333, 7MF4433, and
7MF4533.
FIGURE 9-2 Dimensions, Differential Construction, Diff., Flow and Absolute Models
9-32 September 2004

1 Process connection ¼ -18NPT 12 Electrical connection:

2 Mounting thread M10 or 7/16 –20 UNF Cable gland Pg 13.51, 2
3 Connection side M20 x 1.52 or ½ - 14 NPT or Han 7D plug1, 2
4 Electronics side, digital display
5 Sealing screw 1 – not for explosion proof degree of protection
10 Blanking plug (only for PG 13.5 and Han 7D) 2 – not in FM exp/CSA degree of protection
11 Access cover over magnetic pushbuttons
This Figure is for Models 7MF4433 and 7MF4533 with
H03 option.
FIGURE 9-3 Dimensions, Differential Pressure and Flow Models with H03 Option
September 2004 9-33

1 Process connection of low pressure side ¼ -18NPT 5 Connection side

2 Mounting thread M10, M12 or 7/16 –20 UNF 6 Electronics side, digital display (greater length for
3 Blanking plug cover with window)
4 Electrical connections: 7 Access cover over magnetic pushbuttons
Cable gland Pg 13.5 (with adapter) 8 Sealing screw with valve
M20 x 1.5 or ½ - 14 NPT or
Han 7D/Han 8 U Plug This Figure is for Models 7MF4633 and 7MF4912.
FIGURE 9-4 Dimensions, Flanged Level Models
9-34 September 2004

9.5 NETWORK TOPOLOGY

Point-to-Point
Transmitter Quantity...............................1
Network Signal and Connection .............Analog 4-20 mA, single current loop, see Figures 4-6, 4-
7, and 4-8
Network Resistance ................................See Section 4.3.5
Multi-Drop
Transmitter Quantity...............................1-15
Network Signal and Connection .............Digital, parallel connected, see Figure 4-9
Network Resistance ................................See Section 4.3.5
9.5.1 Two-Wire Cable

Type .....................................................................Twisted single-pair, shielded, copper
Conductor Size for Network Length

Less than 5000 feet (1524 m) ........................24 AWG (0.23 mm2) minimum
More than 5000 feet (1524 m).......................20 AWG (0.56 mm2) minimum, 16 AWG (1.3 mm2)
maximum
Cable Capacitance................................................Refer to Section 4.3.6
Recommendation .................................................Belden 8641, 24 AWG (0.23 mm2)

Belden 8762, 20 AWG (0.56 mm2)
Length, Maximum................................................Refer to Section 4.3.6
9.6 HAZARDOUS AREA CLASSIFICATIONS

Tables 9-8 and 9-9 list the hazardous area classifications available at the time this manual was printed.
Contact your local Siemens representative or the factory for the latest classifications.
CE Approval - A Declaration of Conformity can be found on a later page in this section.
Intrinsically Safe Operation in a Hazardous Area
Operation is permitted only with circuits that are certified as intrinsically safe. The transmitter complies
with Category 1/2 and it may be installed in zone 0.
The EU type examination certificate applies to installation on the walls of containers and pipes that may
contain explosive gas/air or vapor/air mixtures only under atmospheric conditions (pressure: 12 psi to 16
psi, temperature: -20°C to +60°C (-4°F to +140°F)). The permissible ambient temperature range is -40°C
to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F), in explosion hazard areas (for T4) -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F).
The user may also apply the device in non-atmospheric conditions outside the limits set in the EC-Type
Examination Certificate, according to the conditions for use (explosive mixture) and if the required
additional security measures have been met. The limit values stated earlier in this section must be
observed in any case.
September 2004 9-35

Installation in Zone 0
The installation must be adequately sealed (IP67 to EN 60 529). An industry standard (e.g. DIN, NPT)
threaded joint is suitable, for example.
When operating with intrinsically safe power supply units of the “ia” category, the explosion protection
does not depend on the chemical resistance of the seal diaphragm.
When operating with intrinsically safe power supply units of the “ib” category or for units with explosion
proof protection “Ex d” and simultaneous use in zone 0, the explosion protection of the transmitter
depends on chemical resistance of the diaphragm. Under these operating conditions, the transmitter may
be used only for those inflammable gases and liquids to which the diaphragms are adequately chemically
resistant to avoid corrosion.
WARNING
Failure to observe the following precautions could result

in an explosion hazard.
Comply with the specifications of the examination certificate valid in your country.
Comply with your country’s laws and regulations that apply to electrical installation in an explosive
environment.
Be sure that the available power supply complies with the specifications on the transmitter rating plate
and statements in the examination certificate in your country. Dust-proof protection caps in the cable
inlets must be replaced by suitable screw-type gland or dummy plugs that must be appropriately certified
for transmitters with explosion proof type of protection.
9.6.1 CSA Hazardous Locations Precautions

This section provides CSA hazardous location precautions that should be observed by the user when
installing or servicing the equipment described in this manual. These statements supplement those given
in the preceding section.
WARNING
Failure to observe the following precautions could result

in an explosion hazard.
9-36 September 2004

Precautions - English
For Class I, Division 1 and Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations:

• Use only factory-authorized replacement parts. Substitution of components can impair the suitability
of this equipment for hazardous locations.
For Division 2 hazardous locations:
When the equipment described in this Instruction in installed without safety barriers, the following
precautions should be observed. Switch off electrical power at its source (in non-hazardous location)
before connecting or disconnecting power, signal, or other wiring.
Précautions - Français
Emplacements dangereux de classe I, division 1 et classe I, division 2:

• Les pièces de rechange doivent être autorisées par l’usine. Les substitutions peuvent rendre cet
appareil impropre à l’utilisation dans les emplacements dangereux.
Emplacement dangereux de division 2:
Lorsque l’appareil décrit dans la notice ci-jointe est installé sans barrières de sécurité, on doit couper
l’alimentation électrique a la source (hors de l’emplacement dangereux) avant d’effectuer les opérations
suivantes branchment ou débranchement d’un circuit de puissance, de signalisation ou autre.
September 2004 9-37

FIGURE 9-5 Declaration of Conformity
9-38 September 2004

CERTIFICATE OF NACE COMPLIANCE

Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
1201 Sumneytown Pike
Spring House, PA 19477
certifies under its sole responsibility that a SITRANS DSIII Pressure Transmitter with one of the
following factory configured options
Wetted Parts Materials Code B (Hastelloy diaphragm with 316 stainless steel flanges)
DP Non-Wetted Materials Code 2 (stainless steel bolts with aluminum housing)
DP Non-Wetted Materials Code 3 (stainless steel bolts and housing)
Gauge Non-Wetted Materials Code 0 or 3 (aluminum or stainless steel housing)
is in compliance with NACE MR0175-96.
March 16, 2001
Christopher J. O’Brien
Director of Process Instrumentation
Siemens Energy & Automation
Process Industries Division
Spring House, PA 19477
FIGURE 9-6 Certificate of NACE Compliance
September 2004 9-39

9-40 September 2004

UMSITRPDS-1 Glossary
10.0 GLOSSARY
Defined below are terms relevant to the SITRANS P DSIII transmitter, this User’s Manual, pressure
measurement technology, and HART networks.
Absolute (abs) Pressure – A pressure measured against absolute zero or a total vacuum as a reference.
The units of measurement are called absolute pressure units. For example: psia = pounds per square inch
absolute.
Adjust - Zero and full scale are adjusted using a single reference pressure. See Set.
Analog Signaling – A low-current signal of 4 to 20 mAdc from a field instrument to a primary master or
non-signaling hardware.
ANSI – American National Standards Institute
Application Point or Switch Point - The point at which the output current characteristic changes from
linear to square root when a square root output characteristic is selected (Modes 11 and 12).
AWG – American Wire Gauge
Barrier – A device designed to limit the voltage and current in a hazardous area even if certain types of
faults occur on the non-hazardous side of the barrier.
Barrier Resistance – The maximum end-to-end resistance of a barrier, as specified by the barrier
manufacturer. If both supply and return barriers are used in a network, the barrier resistance is the sum of
the end-to-end resistance of both barriers. For active barriers that use resistance to limit current, the
barrier resistance is the internal resistance between the hazardous area terminal and the barrier internal
node where voltage is regulated.
Blind - No reference pressure is applied.
Commissioning – Testing of a transmitter and associated loop to verify transmitter configuration and
loop operation (piping, valving, wiring, control algorithm, data logging, etc.).
Configuration – A database (or archive) created using a HART Communicator and downloaded to a
transmitter to define transmitter operation.
Configure/Configuring – The entering of specific parameter data into a HART Communicator to be

downloaded to a transmitter to define that transmitter’s operating characteristics.
Current Sense Resistor – The resistor in a network across which the field instrument (transmitter) signal
voltages are developed.
Damping – A user-selectable output characteristic that increases the response time of a transmitter to
smooth the output when the input signal contains rapid variations.
Digital Signaling – The high frequency HART signal.
September 2004 10-1

Glossary UMSITRPDS3-1
Explosion-Proof Enclosure – An enclosure that can withstand the explosion of gases within it and
prevent the explosion of gases surrounding it due to sparks, flashes, or the explosion of the container
itself, and maintain an external temperature that will not ignite the surrounding gases.
Field Instrument – A network element that uses current variation for digital signaling or digital plus
analog signaling.
Gauge Pressure – A pressure measured against atmospheric or barometric pressure as a reference. The
units of measurement are called gauge pressure units. For example: psig = pounds per square inch gauge.
HART – Highway Addressable Remote Transducer – A communication protocol that provides

simultaneous analog and digital signaling between master and slave devices. It is supported by the HART
Communications Foundation.
HART Network – A single pair of cabled wires and the attached communicating HART elements.
Intrinsically Safe Instrument – An instrument that will not produce any spark or thermal effects under
normal or abnormal conditions that will ignite a specified gas mixture.
Keyboard or Magnetic Pushbuttons - Three pushbuttons or keys, located under a cover on the electrical
entrance portion of the transmitter enclosure and used for local configuration of the transmitter.
Leporello - The condensed transmitter user’s manual found inside the field terminals enclosure cap. A
book that unfolds in accordion fashion.
Lower Range Limit (LRL) – The lowest value of the measured variable that a transmitter or other
measurement device can be configured to measure.
Lower Range Value (LRV) – Representing the 4 mA point in the transmitter’s output, the LRV is the
lowest value of the measured value that the transmitter can be configured to measure.
MA or pmin- Minimum operating input pressure.
Magnetic Pushbuttons - See Keyboard.
Maximum Overrange – The maximum pressure (static + differential) that can be applied safely to a
transmitter.
ME or pmax - Maximum operating input pressure.
Measuring Cell - Sensor.
Multi-Drop Network – A HART network having from 1 to 15 field instruments that are parallel
connected on a single 2-wire cable. This network uses digital signaling only.
Network – A network includes the following items:

• Transmitter(s)
• Network element (controller, recorder, passive non-signaling element, or other device)
• Cabling interconnecting these devices
10-2 September 2004

UMSITRPDS-1 Glossary
• Barriers for intrinsic safety, if installed

• Current sense resistor
Network Element – Any field instrument or primary or secondary master.
Network Resistance – The sum of the current sense resistance, barrier resistance, if any, and any other
resistance on the network.
NPT – National Pipe Thread
Point-To-Point Network – A network having a single field instrument and primary master. Analog
signaling or analog plus digital signaling is possible.
Polling Address – A unique number assigned during configuration that identifies a transmitter connected
to a network. An address between 1 and 15 assigned to a transmitter connected to a Multi-Drop network.
A transmitter connected to a Point-to-Point network has 0 as an address.
Primary Master – The single controlling network element that communicates with one or more field
instruments, such as a Model 353 Process Automation Controller.
Reranging – Changing a transmitter’s 4 and 20 mA settings (i.e., setting LRV and URV); this is a
configuration function.
Secondary Master – An occasional user of a network, such as the HART Communicator.
Sediment – Solid material that settles in a liquid or gas and can cause blockage that may affect pressure
measurement.
Sensor - Measuring cell
Set - Zero and full scale are set using two reference pressures. See Adjust.
Span – Algebraic difference between the upper and lower range values (URV and LRV).
Switch Point - See Application Point.
Transducer – A device that accepts an input, such as pressure, and converts that input into an output of
some other form, such as a voltage.
Upper Range Limit (URL) – The highest value of the measured variable that a transmitter can be
configured to measure.
Upper Range Value (URV) – Representing the 20 mA point in a transmitter’s output, this is the highest
value of the measured variable that the transmitter is currently configured to measure.
September 2004 10-3

Glossary UMSITRPDS3-1
10-4 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Appendix A - Online Configuration Map
A.0 APPENDIX A - ONLINE CONFIGURATION MAP

This Appendix contains a detailed configuration map showing the available online configuration options
when using the Model 275 HART Communicator – see the Note below.
Note: The Configuration Map for the Model 375 Field

Communicator is shown at the back of this manual. Be
sure to read the manual supplied with the Model 375
before installing or using the device.
To use the map:

1. Connect the Model 275 HART Communicator to a powered SITRANS P DSIII transmitter. See
Section 2 Model 275 HART Communicator and Section 4 Installation.
2. Press the Communicator's I/O key to turn it on. A Communicator self-test routine will be initiated
and, upon successful completion, the Communicator will poll the connected transmitter(s).
3. When the Online menu appears, press 3 to access the Device Setup menu, if configuring or servicing
the transmitter.
Note that 5 items appear in the Device Setup menu. The first three: 1 Process Variables, 2
Diagnostics/Service, and 3 Basic Setup are mapped in Figure A-1 Part 1. The last two: 4 Detailed
Setup and 5 Review are mapped in Figure A-1 Part 2. The figures are on facing pages for ease of use.
September 2004 A-1

Appendix A - Online Configuration Map UMSITRPDS3-1
1 Pressure +
2 Type +
3 Device setup 1 Process variables 1 Pressure +
2 % range +
3 Analog output +
2 Diagnostics/service 1 Diagnosis 1 Min/max pointer 1 Pressure pointer 1 Pressure maximum
2 Pressure minimum
3 Reset pointer
2 El Temperature pointer 1 E1 Temperature max
2 E1 Temperature min
3 Reset pointer
3 Sensor Temperature pointer 1 Sensor Temperature max
2 Sensor Temperature min
3 Reset pointer
2 Operating hours 1 Operating hours E1
2 Operating hours S
3 Warnings/alarms 1 W/A time unit
2 Calibrate interval 1 Calibrate status
2 W/A acknowledge
3 Calibration timer >
4 Calibration warning
5 Calibration alarm
6 W/A activation
3 Service interval 1 Service status
2 W/A acknowledge
3 Service timer
4 Service warning
5 Service alarm
6 W/A activation
4 AO saturation 1 Saturation alarm
2 Alarm duration
3 Alarm activation
4 Status 1 Status summary
2 Hardware/Firmware status
3 Diagnostic alarm status
4 Diagnostic warning status
5 Simulation status
2 Simulation/Test 1 Simulation 1 Loop Test
2 Inputs >
2 Test 1 Self Test
2 Master reset
3 Control modes 1 Local keys control mode
3 Set write protect (enable)
2 Sensor trim 1 Sensor trim points
2 Zero trim
3 Lower sensor trim
4 Upper sensor trim
2 Scaled D/A trim
5 Restore manufacturer 1 All trims
trims 2 DAC trims
4 Sensor trim
2 Raw value
3 Sensor Temperature +
4 El Temperature +
Continued in 5 AO +
Figure A-1 3 Basic setup 1 Tag
Part 2 2 (Engineering) Units
3 Position correction Notes: 1. + = Active data displayed
4 LRV 2. HART Communicator, Rev 5; firmware Rev 2.2
5 URV 3. > = To additional menu(s)
6 Damping
7 Transfer function
FIGURE A-1 Online Configuration Map, Part 1 of 2
A-2 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Appendix A - Online Configuration Map

See Note 4 2 (Engineering) Units
3 Device setup, 2 El temperature +
continued in 2 Signal condition 1 Process variables 1 Pressure +
Figure A-1, 2 % range +
Part 1 3 AO +
3 Zero/span set 1 Keypad input 1 LRV
2 URV
3 Pressure (Eng.) Units
4 LSL
5 USL
2 Apply values
4 Damping
5 Transfer function
6 Measuring speed
3 Output condition 1 Analog output 1 AO +
2 Pressure
3 Alarms >
4 Lower AO limit
5 Upper AO limit
2 Num request preambles
3 Num response preambles
4 Device information 1 Ranges and limits 1 Module range
2 Pressure USL
3 Pressure LSL
4 Pressure minimum span
2 Common device 1 Manufacturer
information 2 Model
3 Measurement type
4 Device order number
5 Explosion protection
6 Device ID
7 Pressure sensor S/N
8 Final assembly number
9 Electrical connector
Electrical housing material
Write protect
Tag
Date
Descriptor
Message
3 Sensor information 1 Process connection
2 Flange type
3 Flange material
4 Process flange bolt
5 Isolator material
6 Fill fluid
7 O-ring material
8 Drain & vent/plug material
9 Drain & vent/plug position
4 Remote seal 1 RS type
2 RS isolator material
3 RS fill fluid
4 Number of remote seal
5 Extension length
5 Local meter 1 Meter type
2 Unit tracking
3 Local display units
4 Bargraph
6 Revision numbers 1 Universal rev.
2 Field device revision
3 Software revision
4 Hardware revision
5 Reviews Step through configuration
FIGURE A-1 Online Configuration Map, Part 2 of 2
September 2004 A-3

Appendix A - Online Configuration Map UMSITRPDS3-1
A-4 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Appendix B - Hazardous Area Installation
B.0 APPENDIX B - HAZARDOUS AREA INSTALLATION

This Appendix presents wiring and barrier selection information for installation of the transmitter in a
hazardous location.
The installer should carefully select barriers based on the required protection, loop wiring, manufacturer’s
barrier performance data, and the data in the control drawings on the next two pages.
September 2004 B-1

Appendix B - Hazardous Area Installation UMSITRPDS3-1
B-2 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Appendix B - Hazardous Area Installation
September 2004 B-3

Appendix B - Hazardous Area Installation UMSITRPDS3-1
B-4 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Appendix C - Elevation and Suppression Corrections
C.0 APPENDIX C - ELEVATION AND SUPPRESSION CORRECTIONS

When installing a transmitter to measure liquid level, configuration of the Sensor Input Block often must
include an adjustment for one of two conditions introduced by the mounting arrangement:
• Elevated Span - The Lower Range Value (LRV) of the transmitter needs to be configured above “0.”
See Figure C-1.
• Suppressed Span - The LRV of the transmitter needs to be configured below “0.” See Figure C-2.
HP Shut-Off Fill Connection

Max. Range Valve LP Shut-Off
Valve
Span
Vent Suppressed See
Min. Range
Max. Range Span Section 9
Specifi-
Span cations
for range
Min. Range limit.
Elevated Span: To MG00363b
calculate maximum
distance, subtract
actual span setting LP line
HP Shut-Off filled with
from range limit given Valve
in specification. condensate
Vent
Distance X
HP LP
MG00363b
HP LP
FIGURE C-1 Elevated Span FIGURE C-2 Suppressed Span
A brief discussion of how to make adjustments for elevation and suppression follows. Then two examples
of the calculations needed to determine configuration parameters are given. Finally, a brief procedure that
does not involve calculations is provided.
C.1 HOW ADJUSTMENT IS MADE
Because the transmitter can handle elevation and suppression simply by setting parameters, it is not
necessary to introduce mechanical measures, such as installing piping backwards or adding additional
hardware.
The range of the transmitter can be set anywhere, forward or reverse acting, as long as the following
criteria are met:
LRL ≤ LRV ≤ URL
LRL ≤ URV ≤ URL
Span = [URV - LRV] ≥ Min Span
Note that the URL (Upper Range Limit), LRL (Lower Range Limit), and Min Span are transmitter
dependent.
September 2004 C-1

Appendix C - Elevation and Suppression Correction UMSITRPDS3-1
C.2 ELEVATION CALCULATION EXAMPLE
Figure C-3 shows a sample transmitter installation.

1. Calculate the differential pressure as follows. Max. Range
H2O 100"
SpG=1.0
Pressure@DP = (H × SpG)High Side - (H × SpG)Low Side Min. Range
where H = Height
2. Calculate the LRV when the tank is empty.

120" Vent
LRV = (120 × 1.0)High Side - (0 × 1.0)Low Side
LRV = +120 inH2O
MG00363b
3. Calculate the URV.

HP LP
URV = LRV + Span

FIGURE C-3 Elevation Calculation
URV = +120 + 100
URV = 220 inH2O
Therefore, transmitter range should be 120 to 220 inH2O.
C.3 SUPPRESSION CALCULATION EXAMPLE
Figure C-4 shows a sample transmitter installation.
1. Calculate the differential pressure as follows. Max. Range 100"

H2O
Span
SpG=1.0
Pressure@DP = (H × SpG)High Side - (H × SpG)Low Side
Min. Range
where H = Height LP Line
HP LP
Filled with
2. Calculate the LRV when the tank is empty. MG00363b
Condensate
LRV = (0 × 1.0)High Side - (100 × 1.0)Low Side FIGURE C-4 Suppression Calculation
LRV = -100 inH2O
3. Calculate the URV.
URV = LRV + Span

URV = -100 + 100
URV = 0 inH2O
Therefore, transmitter range should be -100 to 0 inH2O.
C-2 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Appendix C - Elevation and Suppression Corrections
C.4 RECOMMENDED METHOD
An alternative to making the above calculations and entering derived values is to shift the span directly
using the HART Communicator while adjusting the process levels.
1. Range the transmitter using the HART Communicator as for a zero-based span (e.g., 0-100 inH2O).
2. Install the transmitter on the process.
3. Fill the impulse pipe (wet legs) to the transmitter, but maintain the process at 0 (e.g., empty tank).
4. Perform one of the following:
• HART Communicator - From the Online menu, press 3 Device Setup, 3 Basic Setup, and then 4
LRV. Press ENTER to set the current pressure as the LRV. The configured span will be retained.
• Local Pushbuttons - Use the M pushbutton to select Mode 7. Set zero by simultaneously pressing
the Ï and Ð pushbuttons for 2 seconds; the selected current will appear in the display. The
configured span will be retained.
This completes the procedure.

September 2004 C-3

Appendix C - Elevation and Suppression Correction UMSITRPDS3-1
C-4 September 2004

UMSITRPDS3-1 Warranty
WARRANTY
(a) Seller warrants that on the date of shipment the goods are of the kind and quality described
herein and are free of non-conformities in workmanship and material. This warranty does not
apply to goods delivered by Seller but manufactured by others.
(b) Buyer's exclusive remedy for a nonconformity in any item of the goods shall be the repair or
the replacement (at Seller's option) of the item and any affected part of the goods. Seller’s
obligation to repair or replace shall be in effect for a period of one (1) year from initial operation
of the goods but not more than eighteen (18) months from Seller’s shipment of the goods,
provided Buyer has sent written notice within that period of time to Seller that the goods do not
conform to the above warranty. Repaired and replacement parts shall be warranted for the
remainder of the original period of notification set forth above, but in no event less than 12
months from repair or replacement. At its expense, Buyer shall remove and ship to Seller any
such nonconforming items and shall reinstall the repaired or replaced parts. Buyer shall grant
Seller access to the goods at all reasonable times in order for Seller to determine any
nonconformity in the goods. Seller shall have the right of disposal of items replaced by it. If
Seller is unable or unwilling to repair or replace, or if repair or replacement does not remedy the
nonconformity, Seller and Buyer shall negotiate an equitable adjustment in the contract price,
which may include a full refund of the contract price for the nonconforming goods.
(c) SELLER HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

EXCEPT THAT OF TITLE. SPECIFICALLY, IT DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
COURSE OF DEALING AND USAGE OF TRADE.
(d) Buyer and successors of Buyer are limited to the remedies specified in this article and shall
have no others for a nonconformity in the goods. Buyer agrees that these remedies provide Buyer
and its successors with a minimum adequate remedy and are their exclusive remedies, whether
Buyer's or its successors’ remedies are based on contract, warranty, tort (including negligence),
strict liability, indemnity, or any other legal theory, and whether arising out of warranties,
representations, instructions, installations, or non-conformities from any cause.
(e) Note: This article does not apply to any software which may be furnished by Seller. In such
cases, the attached Software License Addendum applies.
September 2004 W-1

Warranty UMSITRPDS3-1
W-2 September 2004

Online Configuration Map for Siemens SITRANS P DSIII
Pressure Transmitters (with Model 275 HART COMMUNICATOR)
1 Pressure +
2 Type +
3 Device setup 1 Process variables 1 Pressure +
2 % range +
3 Analog output +
2 Diagnostics/service 1 Diagnosis 1 Min/max pointer 1 Pressure pointer 1 Pressure maximum
2 Pressure minimum
3 Reset pointer
2 El Temperature pointer 1 E1 Temperature max
2 E1 Temperature min
3 Reset pointer
3 Sensor temperature pointer 1 Sensor temperature max
2 Sensor temperature min
3 Reset pointer
2 Operating hours 1 Operating hours E1
2 Operating hours S
3 Warnings/alarms 1 W/A time unit
2 Calibrate interval 1 Calibrate status
2 W/A acknowledge
3 Calibration timer >
4 Calibration warning
5 Calibration alarm
6 W/A activation
2 W/A acknowledge
3 Service timer
4 Service warning
5 Service alarm
6 W/A activation
4 AO saturation 1 Saturation alarm
2 Alarm duration
3 Alarm activation
4 Status 1 Status summary
2 Hardware/Firmware status
3 Diagnostic alarm status
4 Diagnostic warning status
5 Simulation status
2 Simulation/Test 1 Simulation 1 Loop test
2 Inputs >
2 Test 1 Self test
2 Master reset
3 Control modes 1 Local keys control mode
3 Set write protect (enable)
2 Sensor trim 1 Sensor trim points
2 Zero trim
3 Lower sensor trim
4 Upper sensor trim
2 Scaled D/A trim
5 Restore manufacturer 1 All trims
trims 2 DAC trims
4 Sensor trim
2 Raw value
4 El Temperature +
Continued in 5 AO +
Figure A-1 3 Basic setup 1 Tag
Part 2 2 (Engineering) units
3 Position correction Notes: 1. + = Active data displayed
4 LRV 2. HART Communicator, Rev 5; firmware Rev 2.2
5 URV 3. > = To additional menu(s)
6 Damping
7 Transfer function
Continued on other side.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Rev. 1, March 2001
1
Online Configuration Map for Siemens SITRANS P DSIII, Continued
See Note 4 2 (Engineering) Units
3 Device setup, 2 El temperature +
continued in 2 Signal condition 1 Process variables 1 Pressure +
Figure A-1, 2 % range +
Part 1 3 AO +
3 Zero/span set 1 Keypad input 1 LRV
2 URV
3 Pressure (Eng.) Units
4 LSL
5 USL
2 Apply values
4 Damping
5 Transfer function
6 Measuring speed
3 Output condition 1 Analog output 1 AO +
2 Pressure
3 Alarms >
4 Lower AO limit
5 Upper AO limit
4 Device information 1 Ranges and limits 1 Module range
2 Pressure USL
3 Pressure LSL
4 Pressure minimum span
2 Common device 1 Manufacturer
information 2 Model
3 Measurement type
4 Device order number
5 Explosion protection
6 Device ID
7 Pressure sensor S/N
8 Final assembly number
9 Electrical connector
Electrical housing material
Write protect
Tag
Date
Descriptor
Message
3 Sensor information 1 Process connection
2 Flange type
3 Flange material
5 Isolator material
6 Fill fluid
7 O-ring material
8 Drain & vent/plug material
9 Drain & vent/plug position
4 Remote seal 1 RS type
3 RS fill fluid
4 Number of remote seal
5 Extension length
2 Unit tracking
3 Local display units
4 Bargraph
6 Revision numbers 1 Universal rev.
2 Field device revision
3 Software revision
4 Hardware revision
5 Reviews Step through configuration
2
Online Configuration Map for
Siemens SITRANS P DSIII Pressure Transmitter with
Model 375 Field Communicator
Notes:
1 Model 375 Field Communicator Firmware Rev. F1.6

2 Online 1 Pressure (PV) +
2 PV status 2 + = active data (measurement) display
3 Module type M = method (i.e. short procedure)
4 Identification 1 Operation Unit 1 Tag
2 Ext (Long) Tag --> M
3 Descriptor
4 Message
5 Date
2 Device 1 Manufacturer
2 Model
3 Device identification
4 Distributor
5 MLFB Order Number 1 MLFB Order No --> M
6 Measurement type
7 Fabrication-No
8 Final asembly number
9 Sensor serial number
10 Revisions 1 Universal rev.
2 Field device rev.
3 Software rev.
4 Hardware rev.
3 Basic Parameters 1 Pressure unit
2 LSL (Lower Sensor Limit)
3 USL (Upper Sensor Limit)
4 Minimum Span
5 LRV (Lower Range Value)
6 URV (Upper Range Value)
7 Pressure damping
8 Pressure xfer function xfer = transfer
5 Config Inp/Outp 1 Quick-Setup & Meas. 1 PV, Current, Status 1 PV +
2 AO (analogue output) +
3 PV % range +
4 Status see ---> 6 Diagnosis/Service
5 Measurement type
2 Meas.Val. & Status 1 Pressure Values 1 Pressure +
2 Pres status
3 Untrimmed pressure +
4 Untrimmed pres status
2 Temperature Values 1 Sens-Temp +
2 Sens-Temp status
3 Electr-Temp +
4 Electr-Temp status
3 Level, Vol, Mass Values 1 Level +
(shown if valid items) 2 Level status
3 Volume +
4 Volume status
5 Mass flow +
6 Mass status
4 Vol-, Mass- & Flow Values 1 Vol-Flow +
(shown if valid items) 2 Vol-Flow status
3 Mass-Flow +
4 Mass-Flow status
5 Appl & Stat 1 Customer Defined
(shown if valid items) 2 Customer Defined Status
3 Quick-Setup 1 Tag
2 Ext TAG --> M
3 PV is
4 PV unit
5 Position correction 1 Position corr --> M
6 LRV
7 URV
8 Pressure damping
9 Pressure xfer function
2 Input 1 Config Pres/Temp 1 Pressure sensor 1 Pressure +
2 Untrimmed pres +
3 Pressure units 1 Pres abs/rel
2 Pressure unit
3 Untrimmed pres unit
2 Temperature sensor 1 Sens-Temp +
2 Electr-Temp +
3 Temp units 1 Sens-Temp unit
2 Electr-Temp unit
3 Pres units see --> 1 Pressure sensor
4 Temp units see --> 1 Temperature sensor
Continued on pg 2 2 Display Process Variables 1 Process variables 1 PV measurement +
2 PV % range
3 AO
4 S Temperature +
5 El Temperature +
6 Untrimmed pressure +
Page 1
5 Config Inp/Outp, 2 Input, Continued 3 Meas Switch/Mapper 1 measurement
Continued 2 PV is
3 SV is
4 TV is
5 QV is
6 (measurement) config 1 Input scaling 1 Pres abs/rel
e.g. Level 2 Pressure unit
3 Input LRV
4 Input URV
2 Level scaling 1 Level unit
e.g. Level scaling 2 Level LRV
3 Level URV
3 Volume scaling 1 Volume unit
2 Vol LRV
3 Vol URV
2 Density unit
3 Density
3 Mass unit
e.g. Flow 2 Pressure unit
3 Input LRV
4 Input URV
2 Flow scaling 1 Vol flow unit
2 Vol flow LRV
3 Vol flow URV
2 Density unit
3 Density
3 Mass flow unit
e.g. Customer 2 Pressure unit
3 Input LRV
4 Input URV
3 Customer scaling 1 Cust unit (5 Ch)
2 Cust LRV
3 Cust URV
7 User linearization 1 Special Curve status --> only if meas not pres
if Level, Flow or Customer 2 No curve points
this is valid - otherwise not 3 Setup special char --> M
4 Display special char --> M
4 Meas.Limits & Span 1 Module range
2 Active Device Variables 1 Pressure 1 Pressure unit
2 Pres USL
3 Pres LSL
4 min span
5 Trimpoint sum
2 Sens-Temp 1 Sens-Temp unit
2 Sens-Temp USL
3 Sens-Temp LSL
4 Sens-Temp min.span
3 Electr-Temp 1 Electr-Temp unit
2 Electr-Temp USL
3 Electr-Temp LSL
4 Electr-Temp min.span
4 Untrimmed Pres 1 Untrimmed Pres unit
2 Untrimmed Pres USL
3 Untrimmed Pres LSL
4 Untr Pres min.span
additional if measurement 5 Level 1 Level unit
is mapped to level 2 Level USL
3 Level LSL
4 Level min.span
additional if measurement 6 Volume 1 Volume unit
is mapped to level 2 Volume USL
3 Volume LSL
4 Volume min.span
additional if measurement 7 Mass 1 Mass unit
is mapped to level 2 Mass USL
3 Mass LSL
4 Mass min.span
additional if measurement 5 Vol-Flow 1 Vol-Flow unit
is mapped to flow 2 Vol-Flow USL
3 Vol-Flow LSL
4 Vol-Flow min.span
additional if measurement 6 Mass-Flow 1 Mass-Flow unit
Continued on pg 3 is mapped to flow 2 Mass-Flow USL
3 Mass-Flow LSL
4 Mass-Flow min.span
additional if measurement 5 Customer 1 (PV) unit
is mapped to customer 2 Customer USL
3 Customer LSL
4 Customer min. span
Page 2
5 Config inp/outp, 3 Output 1 Analog output 1 Analog output +
Continued 2 Percent range +
3 Pres xfer function Linear
Sq Rt, lin to Strtpt
Sq Rt, 4 mA to Strtpt
Sq Rt, 2 steps lin to Startpt
NA/4 Startpoint square root
4/5 Zero and Span 1 Zero/Span set 1 Out Scaling PV >1
2 Apply values >2
5/6 Current Limits 1 Lower AO Limit
2 Upper AO Limit
6/7 Alarms 1 AO Alarm Type
2 Alarm LRV
3 Alarm URV
2 Sensor trim points 1 Lower sensor trim point
2 Upper sensor trim point
3 HART output 1 Polling address
2 Unit tracking
3 Local Display unit
4 LCD Settings 1 LCD Scaling, if On: 2 LCD Unit
5 Bargraph 3 LCD LRV
4 LCD URV
6 Access Control 1 Local keys control mode
2 Write protect
3 Set write protect --> M
5 Mech. Construction 1 No of electronic changes
Mech = mechanical 2 Design 1 Sensor 1 Fill fluid
2 Isolation material (diaphr)
3 O ring material
4 Module range
2 Remote Seal 1 Number remote seal (RS)
2 RS type
4 RS fill fluid
5 Extension length
6 Extension type
7 Capillary length
3 Process Connection 1 Process Connection
2 DrainVent / plug mat
3 DrainVent / plug pos
5 Flange type
6 Flange material
4 Electronic Connection 1 Electr housing material
2 Electr connection
6 Diagnosis/Service 1 Status 1 Status summary
2 Extended device status
3 Hardw/Firmw status 1 RAM failure
2 ROM failure OFF = OK
3 Electronic EEPROM ON = Problem
# List continues
4 Diag Alarm Status 1 Calibration Alarm
2 Service Alarm
# List continues
5 Diag Warn Status 1 Calibration Warning
2 Service warning
# List continues
6 Simulation status 1 Pressure simulation
2 El simulation
3 Sensor temp simulation
2 Device 1 Selftest/Reset 1 Selftest --> M
2 Display Test --> M
3 Master reset --> M
4 Changes Config 1 Config changed counter
2 Sensor trim 1 Restore mfgr trims --> M mfgr = manufacturer
2 Sensor trim 1 Sensor trim points 1 Lower sensor trim point
2 Upper sensor trim point
2 Sensor trim 1 Pres zero trim--> M
2 Lower sensor trim --> M
3 Upper sensor trim --> M
3 Trimpoint summary
3 Trim analog output 1 D/A trim --> M
Continued on pg 4 2 Scaled D/A trim --> M
4 Position correction 1 Position corr --> M
3 Simulation/Test 1 Loop test --> M Simulation AO
2 Inputs --> M Simulation Fixed / Ramp
4 Access Control 1 Local keys control mode
2 Write protect
3 Set write protect --> M
Page 3
6 Diagnosis/Service, 3 Diagnostic settings 1 W/A time unit W/A = warning/alarm
Continued 2 Calib interval 1 Calib status
2 W/A acknowledge --> M
3 Calib timer 1 Calib time
2 Reset timer --> M
4 Calib warning
5 Calib alarm
6 W/A activation
2 W/A acknowledge --> M
3 Service timer 1 Service time
2 Reset timer --> M
4 Service warning
5 Service alarm
6 W/A activation
4 AO saturation 1 AO alarm type
2 Saturation alarm
3 Alarm duration
4 Alarm activation
5 Limiter setup 1 Display limiter --> M
2 Setup limiter --> M
3 Limiter status --> M
4 Limiter: Ack W/A --> M Ack = acknowledge
5 CmpCnt: Ack W/A --> M CmpCnt = Comparation Counter
6 Reset counter. --> M
4 View 1 Operating hours 1 Operating hours Electr
2 Operating hours Sensor
3 Min/Max pointer 1 Pressure pointer 1 Pres max
2 Pres min
3 Reset pointer --> M
2 Electr-Temp pointer 1 Electr-Temp max
2 Electr- Temp min
3 Sens-Temp pointer 1 Sens-Temp max
2 Sens-Temp min
7 Certif & Approv 1 Explos. Protection
Certif=Certification Explos = Explosion
Approv=Approval
Page 4

7MF4033 1ga10 2ab6 Za01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7MF4033 1ga10 2ab6 Za01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7MF4033 1ga10 2ab6 Za01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Siemens

Energy & Automation USER'S MANUAL

SITRANS P, Series DSIII Transmitter

MODEL 275 HART COMMUNICATOR AND

APPLICATION AND MODEL QUICK LOCATOR

Measurement Models Model Designation Specifications Dimensions

7MF4033 Table 9-1 Table 9-15 Figure 9-1

2.0 MODEL 275 UNIVERSAL HART COMMUNICATOR .............................................................2-1

3.0 PRE-INSTALLATION TEST .........................................................................................................3-1

4.0 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Receipt of Shipment ...............................................................................................................4-1

5.0 POST-INSTALLATION TEST .......................................................................................................5-1

6.0 ON-LINE CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION.....................................................................6-1

September 2004 iii

6.4.19.4 Monitoring the Saturation Current .............................................................................6-32

7.0 CALIBRATION AND MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................7-1

8.0 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................8-1

9.0 MODEL DESIGNATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................9-1

A.0 APPENDIX A - ONLINE CONFIGURATION MAP ................................................................. A-1

B.0 APPENDIX B - HAZARDOUS AREA INSTALLATION .......................................................... B-1

C.0 APPENDIX C - ELEVATION AND SUPPRESSION CORRECTIONS .................................. C-1

ONLINE CONFIGURATION MAPS..........................................................................At back of manual

1-1 Gauge Construction, Pressure and Absolute Models..........................................................................1-3

2-1 Model 275 Universal HART Communicator......................................................................................2-2

3-1 Bench Test Connections .....................................................................................................................3-1

5-1 Equipment Connection for System Checkout.....................................................................................5-2

5-3 Measuring Vapor and Liquid..............................................................................................................5-7

6-1 Digital Display....................................................................................................................................6-1

7-1 Transmitter Exploded View................................................................................................................7-9

8-1 Transmitter Block Diagram ................................................................................................................8-1

9-1 Dimensions, Gauge Construction, Pressure and Absolute Models...................................................9-31

A-1 Online Configuration Map................................................................................................................ A-2

B-1 Control Drawing for Sitrans P DSIII Transmitter............................................................................. B-2

C-1 Elevated Span Example .................................................................................................................... C-1

1-1 Measurement and Model vs. Figure References.................................................................................1-2

4-1 Operating Mode and Network ..........................................................................................................4-10

4-2 Flange and Extension Dimensions....................................................................................................4-25

6-1 Operating Mode and Status Arrows ...................................................................................................6-2

9-1 Model 7MF4033, Model Designation ................................................................................................9-2

Changes for Revision 4, September 2004

September 2004 vii

Conventions, Symbols, and General Information

Conventions and Symbols

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in

Indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an

Explosion hazard. Indicates that the danger of an explosion hazard exists.

Electrostatic discharge. The presence of this symbol indicates that

viii September 2004

General Warnings and Cautions

Save this user’s manual. It should be available to those installing, configuring,

Section 8, Circuit Description, contains an assembly-level circuit description to support transmitter

September 2004 1-1

Section 10, Glossary, contains definitions of various transmitter-related terms.

1.2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

The transmitter is a microcontroller-based, self-contained pressure-to-current transducer. A measuring

TABLE 1-1 Measurements, Models and Figure References

Measurement Model And Measuring Cell Construction Refer To